US20240000637A1 - Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones - Google Patents

Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20240000637A1
US20240000637A1 US18/342,054 US202318342054A US2024000637A1 US 20240000637 A1 US20240000637 A1 US 20240000637A1 US 202318342054 A US202318342054 A US 202318342054A US 2024000637 A1 US2024000637 A1 US 2024000637A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
belt
pathway
tear
frangible
edge
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US18/342,054
Inventor
Nicholas Alexander TAYLOR
Keith Richard Willhaus
Han Xu
Jeromy Thomas Raycheck
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Procter and Gamble Co
Original Assignee
Procter and Gamble Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Procter and Gamble Co filed Critical Procter and Gamble Co
Priority to US18/342,054 priority Critical patent/US20240000637A1/en
Publication of US20240000637A1 publication Critical patent/US20240000637A1/en
Assigned to THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY reassignment THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: RAYCHECK, JEROMY THOMAS, TAYLOR, NICHLAS ALEXANDER, WILLHAUS, KEITH RICHARD, XU, HAN
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • A61F13/49007Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers
    • A61F13/49009Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers with elastic means
    • A61F13/49011Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers with elastic means the elastic means is located at the waist region
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • A61F13/49058Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers characterised by the modular concept of constructing the diaper
    • A61F13/4906Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers characterised by the modular concept of constructing the diaper the diaper having an outer chassis forming the diaper and an independent absorbent structure attached to the chassis
    • A61F13/49061Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers characterised by the modular concept of constructing the diaper the diaper having an outer chassis forming the diaper and an independent absorbent structure attached to the chassis the diaper having one or two waist members forming the diaper waist region and an independent absorbent structure attached to the one or two waist members forming the crotch region
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/66Garments, holders or supports not integral with absorbent pads
    • A61F13/68Garments, holders or supports not integral with absorbent pads abdominal enclosing type
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15577Apparatus or processes for manufacturing
    • A61F13/15585Apparatus or processes for manufacturing of babies' napkins, e.g. diapers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15577Apparatus or processes for manufacturing
    • A61F13/15699Forming webs by bringing together several webs, e.g. by laminating or folding several webs, with or without additional treatment of the webs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15577Apparatus or processes for manufacturing
    • A61F13/15707Mechanical treatment, e.g. notching, twisting, compressing, shaping
    • A61F13/15723Partitioning batts; Cutting
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15577Apparatus or processes for manufacturing
    • A61F13/15707Mechanical treatment, e.g. notching, twisting, compressing, shaping
    • A61F13/15739Sealing, e.g. involving cutting
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15577Apparatus or processes for manufacturing
    • A61F13/15707Mechanical treatment, e.g. notching, twisting, compressing, shaping
    • A61F13/15747Folding; Pleating; Coiling; Stacking; Packaging
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15577Apparatus or processes for manufacturing
    • A61F13/15756Applying tabs, strips, tapes, loops; Knotting the ends of pads
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • A61F13/49007Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers
    • A61F13/49009Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers with elastic means
    • A61F13/4902Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers with elastic means characterised by the elastic material
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • A61F13/493Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers adjustable by adding or removing material, e.g. umbilical cord arrangements
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • A61F13/496Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers in the form of pants or briefs
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/51Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
    • A61F13/511Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin
    • A61F13/512Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin characterised by its apertures, e.g. perforations
    • A61F13/5126Topsheet, i.e. the permeable cover or layer facing the skin characterised by its apertures, e.g. perforations characterised by the planar distribution of the apertures, e.g. in a predefined pattern
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/51Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the outer layers
    • A61F13/514Backsheet, i.e. the impermeable cover or layer furthest from the skin
    • A61F13/51474Backsheet, i.e. the impermeable cover or layer furthest from the skin characterised by its structure
    • A61F13/51478Backsheet, i.e. the impermeable cover or layer furthest from the skin characterised by its structure being a laminate, e.g. multi-layered or with several layers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/551Packaging before or after use
    • A61F13/55105Packaging before or after use packaging of diapers
    • A61F13/5512Packaging before or after use packaging of diapers after use
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/5622Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/5622Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like
    • A61F13/5633Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like open type diaper
    • A61F13/5644Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like open type diaper having more than one pair of fasteners
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/5622Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like
    • A61F13/565Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like pants type diaper
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/5622Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like
    • A61F13/565Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like pants type diaper
    • A61F13/5655Supporting or fastening means specially adapted for diapers or the like pants type diaper adjustable pants type diapers
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/62Mechanical fastening means, ; Fabric strip fastener elements, e.g. hook and loop
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/62Mechanical fastening means, ; Fabric strip fastener elements, e.g. hook and loop
    • A61F13/622Fabric strip fastener elements, e.g. hook and loop
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/62Mechanical fastening means, ; Fabric strip fastener elements, e.g. hook and loop
    • A61F13/622Fabric strip fastener elements, e.g. hook and loop
    • A61F13/625Fabric strip fastener elements, e.g. hook and loop characterised by the hook
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/56Supporting or fastening means
    • A61F13/64Straps, belts, ties or endless bands
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/84Accessories, not otherwise provided for, for absorbent pads
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15203Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency
    • A61F2013/15284Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency characterized by quantifiable properties
    • A61F2013/15292Resistance, i.e. modulus or strength
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15203Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency
    • A61F2013/15284Properties of the article, e.g. stiffness or absorbency characterized by quantifiable properties
    • A61F2013/15406Basis weight
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/15577Apparatus or processes for manufacturing
    • A61F2013/15821Apparatus or processes for manufacturing characterized by the apparatus for manufacturing
    • A61F2013/15934Apparatus or processes for manufacturing characterized by the apparatus for manufacturing for making non-woven
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • A61F13/49007Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers
    • A61F13/49009Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers with elastic means
    • A61F13/4902Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers with elastic means characterised by the elastic material
    • A61F2013/49025Form-fitting, self-adjusting disposable diapers with elastic means characterised by the elastic material having multiple elastic strands
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/45Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators characterised by the shape
    • A61F13/49Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers
    • A61F2013/49087Absorbent articles specially adapted to be worn around the waist, e.g. diapers having breakable lateral stitches or panels
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/84Accessories, not otherwise provided for, for absorbent pads
    • A61F2013/8497Accessories, not otherwise provided for, for absorbent pads having decorations or indicia means

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to absorbent articles, and more particularly, to absorbent articles having front and/or back waist regions including one or more frangible pathways.
  • Some absorbent articles have components that include elastomeric laminates.
  • Such elastomeric laminates may include an elastic material bonded to one or more nonwovens.
  • the elastic material may include an elastic film and/or elastic strands.
  • a plurality of elastic strands are joined to a nonwoven while the plurality of strands are in a stretched condition so that when the elastic strands relax, the nonwoven gathers, and in turn, forms corrugations and rugosities.
  • the resulting elastomeric laminate is stretchable to the extent that the corrugations allow the elastic strands to elongate.
  • Absorbent articles in the form of diaper pants may also be configured with an absorbent chassis connected with front and back elastic belts, wherein opposing end regions of the front and back belts are connected with each other at side seams.
  • the elasticity of the front and back belts is removed in regions where the chassis connects with the belts.
  • stretched elastic strands are glued between two continuous nonwoven webs to form an elastic laminate. Regions of the elastic strands may then be intermittently deactivated along the length of the elastic laminate by cutting the elastic strands in areas to be connected with the chassis, sometimes referred to as tummy elastic cutting.
  • Some caregivers of older incontinent babies or toddlers may prefer a closed, pant-style disposable absorbent article to enable application to, and removal from, a child while the child is in a standing position.
  • One disadvantage of this product form is that the removal and disposal of feces-containing products may be unhygienic and inconvenient. For example, pulling the product down could cause feces to smear down the legs of a user.
  • a caregiver may tear open the bonded sides using force. In turn, the force used can lead to a rapid release of energy from the diaper, causing the caregiver to lose control of the product and allowing feces to spill out.
  • some diaper pants may be configured with tear lines in the front belt or back belt.
  • tear lines may include perforations that allow a caregiver to more easily separate the belt along the perforation lines.
  • the diaper pant can be more easily removed from the wearer without having to slide the diaper pant down the wearer's legs, in a similar manner as a traditional open taped diaper form.
  • the caregiver may not be in a position to tear along such tear lines so that the belt is severed along the tear line.
  • the caregiver may tear the belt in an unintended manner causing the belt to tear not along the perforation line but in other locations.
  • This can lead to more difficulty in removing the product.
  • difficulty in removing the diaper may require a caregiver to utilize both hands to start and complete the tearing operation.
  • some tear lines may require a caregiver to grasp the belt on opposing sides of the tear line and pull in opposite directions to initiate and complete the tearing process.
  • the necessity of tearing such a belt with both hands can add difficulty to the process of removing a diaper pant from baby or child that is moving or attempting to move during the diaper removal process.
  • pant-style articles that provide the caregiver the ability to remove and dispose soiled products in a similar manner to traditional open diaper forms.
  • diaper pants with frangible pathways configured such that the tearing operation can be initiated and completed such that the belt separates only along the frangible pathway and not in other locations of the diaper.
  • an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; and a frang
  • an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt comprising laterally opposing end portions connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, the frangible pathway comprising
  • an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a first belt comprising
  • an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; and a fr
  • an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, where
  • FIG. 1 shows a perspective view of a diaper pant in a pre-fastened configuration.
  • FIG. 1 A shows a perspective view of a diaper pant with a continuous outer cover in a pre-fastened configuration.
  • FIG. 2 A shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer.
  • FIG. 2 B shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces toward a wearer oriented toward the viewer.
  • FIG. 2 C shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer, illustrating first and second belt size and shape features.
  • FIG. 2 D shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer, illustrating first and second belt size and shape features.
  • FIG. 2 E shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer, illustrating first and second belt size and shape features.
  • FIG. 2 F shows a plan view of a diaper pant with a continuous outer cover with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the diaper pant of FIG. 2 A taken along line 3 - 3 showing first and second elastic belts provided with panel layers.
  • FIG. 3 A is a cross-sectional detailed view of a first belt provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3 A 1 is a cross-sectional detailed view of another example configuration wherein the first belt is provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3 A 2 is a cross-sectional detailed view of another example configuration wherein the first belt is provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3 B is a cross-sectional detailed view of a second belt provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3 C is a cross-sectional view of the diaper pant of FIG. 2 F taken along line 3 C- 3 C showing first and second elastic belts provided with panel layers and a continuous outer cover.
  • FIG. 4 is perspective view of a diaper pant including frangible pathways in a front belt and adjacent an absorbent chassis.
  • FIG. 5 A is a perspective view of the diaper pant of FIG. 4 showing the front belt having been torn along one of the frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 5 B is a perspective view of the diaper pant of FIG. 4 showing the front belt having been torn along two frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 6 A is a perspective view of a diaper pant with frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 6 B is a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6 A .
  • FIG. 6 C shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6 B as a first frangible pathway is being torn.
  • FIG. 6 D shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6 C after the first frangible pathway has been completely torn.
  • FIG. 6 E shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6 D as a second frangible pathway is being torn.
  • FIG. 6 F shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6 E after the second frangible pathway has been completely torn.
  • FIG. 7 A is a perspective view of a diaper pant with another configuration of frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 7 B is a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7 A .
  • FIG. 7 C shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7 B as a first frangible pathway is being torn along first and second initial tear zones.
  • FIG. 7 D shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7 C after a first frangible pathway has been torn along first and second initial tear zones.
  • FIG. 7 E shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7 D as the first frangible pathway is being torn along first and second secondary tear zones.
  • FIG. 7 F shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7 E after the first frangible pathway has been completely torn.
  • FIG. 8 A is a detailed view of a fastener component configuration of FIG. 6 A .
  • FIG. 9 A is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the lateral centerline.
  • FIG. 9 B is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the lateral centerline.
  • FIG. 9 C is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the lateral centerline.
  • FIG. 9 D is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the fiber orientation direction.
  • FIG. 9 E is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the fiber orientation direction.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic illustration of the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength.
  • FIG. 11 is a graphical illustration of the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength based on the standard deviation factor.
  • FIG. 12 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 1.
  • FIG. 13 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 2.
  • FIG. 14 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 3.
  • FIG. 15 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 4.
  • FIG. 16 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 5.
  • FIG. 17 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 6.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the fastener component of FIG. 8 A .
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the fastener component of FIG. 8 A wherein the fastener component is integrally formed from belt components.
  • “Absorbent article” refers to devices, which absorb and contain body exudates and, more specifically, refers to devices, which are placed against or in proximity to the body of the wearer to absorb and contain the various exudates discharged from the body.
  • Exemplary absorbent articles include diapers, training pants, pull-on pant-type diapers (i.e., a diaper having a pre-formed waist opening and leg openings such as illustrated in U.S. Pat. No. 6,120,487), refastenable diapers or pant-type diapers, incontinence briefs and undergarments, diaper holders and liners, feminine hygiene garments such as panty liners, absorbent inserts, menstrual pads and the like.
  • Body-facing and “garment-facing” refer respectively to the relative location of an element or a surface of an element or group of elements. “Body-facing” implies the element or surface is nearer to the wearer during wear than some other element or surface. “Garment-facing” implies the element or surface is more remote from the wearer during wear than some other element or surface (i.e., element or surface is proximate to the wearer's garments that may be worn over the disposable absorbent article).
  • elastic refers to materials exhibiting elastic properties, which include any material that upon application of a force to its relaxed, initial length can stretch or elongate to an elongated length more than 10% greater than its initial length and will substantially recover back to about its initial length upon release of the applied force.
  • Elastomeric materials may include elastomeric films, scrims, nonwovens, ribbons, strands, and other sheet-like structures.
  • joind encompasses configurations whereby an element is directly secured to another element by affixing the element directly to the other element, and configurations whereby an element is indirectly secured to another element by affixing the element to intermediate member(s) which in turn are affixed to the other element.
  • distal is used to describe a position situated away from a center of a body or from a point of attachment
  • proximal is used to describe a position situated nearer to a center of a body or a point of attachment.
  • substrate is used herein to describe a material which is primarily two-dimensional (i.e., in an XY plane) and whose thickness (in a Z direction) is relatively small (i.e., 1/10 or less) in comparison to its length (in an X direction) and width (in a Y direction).
  • substrates include a web, layer or layers or fibrous materials, nonwovens, films, and foils such as polymeric films or metallic foils. These materials may be used alone or may comprise two or more layers laminated together. As such, a web is a substrate.
  • nonwoven refers herein to a material made from continuous (long) filaments (fibers) and/or discontinuous (short) filaments (fibers) by processes such as spunbonding, meltblowing, carding, and the like. Nonwovens do not have a woven or knitted filament pattern.
  • machine direction is used herein to refer to the direction of material flow through a process.
  • relative placement and movement of material can be described as flowing in the machine direction through a process from upstream in the process to downstream in the process.
  • cross direction is used herein to refer to a direction that is generally perpendicular to the machine direction.
  • taped diaper refers to disposable absorbent articles having an initial front waist region and an initial back waist region that are not fastened, pre-fastened, or connected to each other as packaged, prior to being applied to the wearer.
  • a taped diaper may be folded about the lateral centerline with the interior of one waist region in surface to surface contact with the interior of the opposing waist region without fastening or joining the waist regions together.
  • Example taped diapers are disclosed in various suitable configurations U.S. Pat. Nos.
  • pant refers herein to disposable absorbent articles having a continuous perimeter waist opening and continuous perimeter leg openings designed for infant or adult wearers.
  • a pant can be configured with a continuous or closed waist opening and at least one continuous, closed, leg opening prior to the article being applied to the wearer.
  • a pant can be preformed or pre-fastened by various techniques including, but not limited to, joining together portions of the article using any refastenable and/or permanent closure member (e.g., seams, heat bonds, pressure welds, adhesives, cohesive bonds, mechanical fasteners, etc.).
  • a pant can be preformed anywhere along the circumference of the article in the waist region (e.g., side fastened or seamed, front waist fastened or seamed, back waist fastened or seamed).
  • Example diaper pants in various configurations are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,940,464; 5,092,861; 5,246,433; 5,897,545; 5,957,908; 6,120,487; 6,120,489; 7,569,039 and U.S. Patent Publication Nos.
  • “Closed-form” means opposing waist regions are joined, as packaged, either permanently or refastenably to form a continuous waist opening and leg openings.
  • Open-form means opposing waist regions are not initially joined to form a continuous waist opening and leg openings but comprise a closure means such as a fastening system to join the waist regions to form the waist and leg openings before or during application to a wearer of the article.
  • an absorbent article may comprise: a first belt and a second belt, each belt comprising a first end region and a second end region laterally separated from the first end region by a central region.
  • the first end region of the first belt is connected with the first end region of the second belt and the second end region of the first belt is connected with the second end region of the second belt to form a waist opening.
  • the absorbent article may further comprise a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet.
  • the chassis may further comprise a first end region and a second end region longitudinally separated from the first end region by a crotch region.
  • the first end region of the chassis may be connected with the central region of the first belt and the second end region of the chassis may be connected with the central region of the second belt.
  • the first belt may further comprise a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge.
  • the first belt and/or the second belt may comprise one or more frangible pathways.
  • a frangible pathway in the first and/or second belt may extend between the inner edge of the first belt and the outer edge of the first belt.
  • the frangible pathway may extend to a proximal terminus on the inner edge and a distal terminus on the outer edge of the first belt.
  • the frangible pathway may comprise a single tear zone or a first tear zone extending to the distal terminus and a second tear zone extending to the proximal terminus.
  • frangible pathway configurations provide a feature that allows an elastic belt of a diaper pant to be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway when removing the diaper pant from a wearer, avoiding the need to remove the diaper pant by sliding the diaper pant over a wearer's legs.
  • the tear strength needed to tear along the frangible pathway may be significantly less than the tear strength to tear the belt so that the tear only propagates along the frangible pathway and not into other areas of the belt.
  • the frangible pathway may be configured to allow a caregiver or wearer to initiate and/or completely tear the first belt with one hand when removing a diaper pant from a wearer.
  • FIGS. 1 - 2 B show an example of an absorbent article 100 in the form of a diaper pant 100 P that may include components constructed in accordance with the configurations disclosed herein.
  • FIG. 1 shows a perspective views of a diaper pant 100 P in a pre-fastened configuration.
  • FIG. 2 A shows a plan view of the diaper pant 100 P with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer
  • FIG. 2 B shows a plan view of the diaper pant 100 P with the portion of the diaper that faces toward a wearer oriented toward the viewer.
  • the diaper pant 100 P includes a chassis 102 and a ring-like elastic belt 104 .
  • a first elastic belt 106 and a second elastic belt 108 are bonded together to form the ring-like elastic belt 104 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P and the chassis 102 each include a first waist region 116 , a second waist region 118 , and a crotch region 119 disposed intermediate the first and second waist regions. It may also be described that the chassis 102 includes a first end region 116 a , a second end region 118 a , and a crotch region 119 disposed intermediate the first and second end regions 116 a , 118 a .
  • the first waist region 116 may be configured as a front waist region
  • the second waist region 118 may be configured as back waist region.
  • the diaper 100 P may also include a laterally extending front waist edge 121 in the front waist region 116 and a longitudinally opposing and laterally extending back waist edge 122 in the back waist region 118 .
  • the diaper 100 P and chassis 102 of FIGS. 2 A and 2 B are shown with a longitudinal axis 124 and a lateral axis 126 .
  • the longitudinal axis 124 may extend through the front waist edge 121 and through the back waist edge 122 .
  • the lateral axis 126 may extend through a first longitudinal or right side edge 128 and through a second longitudinal or left side edge 130 of the chassis 102 .
  • the longitudinal axis 124 extends perpendicularly through the front waist edge 121 and the back waist edge 122
  • the lateral axis 126 extends perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis 124 .
  • the longitudinal direction may extend from the wearer's front waist, through the crotch, to the wearer's back waist.
  • the first elastic belt 106 comprises a longitudinal centerline 124 a and lateral centerline 126 a
  • the second elastic belt 108 comprises a longitudinal centerline 124 b and lateral centerline 126 b
  • the chassis 102 comprises a longitudinal centerline 124 c and lateral centerline 126 c .
  • the longitudinal centerlines 124 a , 124 b , 124 c are perpendicular to the lateral center lines 126 a , 126 b , 126 c.
  • the diaper pant 100 P may include an inner, body facing surface 132 , and an outer, garment facing surface 134 .
  • the chassis 102 may include a backsheet 136 and a topsheet 138 .
  • the chassis 102 may also include an absorbent assembly 140 , including an absorbent core 142 , disposed between a portion of the topsheet 138 and the backsheet 136 .
  • the diaper 100 P may also include other features, such as leg elastics and/or leg cuffs to enhance the fit around the legs of the wearer.
  • the periphery of the chassis 102 may be defined by the first longitudinal side edge 128 , a second longitudinal side edge 130 , a first laterally extending end edge 144 disposed in the first waist region 116 , and a second laterally extending end edge 146 disposed in the second waist region 118 .
  • Both side edges 128 and 130 extend longitudinally between the first end edge 144 and the second end edge 146 .
  • the laterally extending end edges 144 and 146 may be located longitudinally inward from the laterally extending front waist edge 121 in the front waist region 116 and the laterally extending back waist edge 122 in the back waist region 118 .
  • the laterally extending end edges 144 and 146 may be coterminous with or located longitudinally outward from the laterally extending front waist edge 121 in the front waist region 116 and the laterally extending back waist edge 122 in the back waist region 118 .
  • the front waist edge 121 and the back waist edge 122 may encircle a portion of the waist of the wearer.
  • the side edges 128 and 130 may encircle at least a portion of the legs of the wearer.
  • the crotch region 119 may be generally positioned between the legs of the wearer with the absorbent core 142 extending from the front waist region 116 through the crotch region 119 to the back waist region 118 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P may include a backsheet 136 .
  • the backsheet 136 may also define the outer, garment facing surface 134 of the chassis 102 .
  • the backsheet 136 may also comprise a woven or nonwoven material, polymeric films such as thermoplastic films of polyethylene or polypropylene, and/or a multi-layer or composite materials comprising a film and a nonwoven material.
  • the backsheet may also comprise an elastomeric film.
  • An example backsheet 136 may be a polyethylene film having a thickness of from about mm (0.5 mils) to about 0.051 mm (2.0 mils). Further, the backsheet 136 may permit vapors to escape from the absorbent core (i.e., the backsheet is breathable) while still preventing exudates from passing through the backsheet 136 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P may include a topsheet 138 .
  • the topsheet 138 may also define all or part of the inner, wearer facing surface 132 of the chassis 102 .
  • the topsheet 138 may be liquid pervious, permitting liquids (e.g., menses, urine, and/or runny feces) to penetrate through its thickness.
  • a topsheet 138 may be manufactured from a wide range of materials such as woven and nonwoven materials; apertured or hydroformed thermoplastic films; apertured nonwovens, porous foams; reticulated foams; reticulated thermoplastic films; and thermoplastic scrims.
  • Woven and nonwoven materials may comprise natural fibers such as wood or cotton fibers; synthetic fibers such as polyester, polypropylene, or polyethylene fibers; or combinations thereof. If the topsheet 138 includes fibers, the fibers may be spunbond, carded, wet-laid, meltblown, hydroentangled, or otherwise processed as is known in the art. Topsheets 138 may be selected from high loft nonwoven topsheets, apertured film topsheets and apertured nonwoven topsheets. Exemplary apertured films may include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,628,097; 5,916,661; 6,545,197; and 6,107,539, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • the diaper pant 100 P may also include an absorbent assembly 140 that is joined to the chassis 102 .
  • the absorbent assembly 140 may have a laterally extending front edge 148 in the front waist region 116 and may have a longitudinally opposing and laterally extending back edge 150 in the back waist region 118 .
  • the absorbent assembly may have a longitudinally extending right side edge 152 and may have a laterally opposing and longitudinally extending left side edge 154 , both absorbent assembly side edges 152 and 154 may extend longitudinally between the front edge 148 and the back edge 150 .
  • the absorbent assembly 140 may additionally include one or more absorbent cores 142 or absorbent core layers.
  • the absorbent core 142 may be at least partially disposed between the topsheet 138 and the backsheet 136 and may be formed in various sizes and shapes that are compatible with the diaper. Exemplary absorbent structures for use as the absorbent core of the present disclosure are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,610,678; 4,673,402; 4,888,231; and 4,834,735, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • Some absorbent core embodiments may comprise fluid storage cores that contain reduced amounts of cellulosic airfelt material. For instance, such cores may comprise less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or even 1% of cellulosic airfelt material.
  • Such a core may comprise primarily absorbent gelling material in amounts of at least about 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even about 100%, where the remainder of the core comprises a microfiber glue (if applicable).
  • Such cores, microfiber glues, and absorbent gelling materials are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,562,646; 5,669,894; and 6,790,798 as well as U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2004/0158212 A1 and 2004/0097895 A1, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • the diaper 100 P may also include elasticized leg cuffs 156 .
  • the leg cuffs 156 can be and are sometimes also referred to as leg bands, side flaps, barrier cuffs, elastic cuffs or gasketing cuffs.
  • the elasticized leg cuffs 156 may be configured in various ways to help reduce the leakage of body exudates in the leg regions.
  • Example leg cuffs 156 may include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,860,003; 4,909,803; 4,695,278; 4,795,454; 4,704,115; 4,909,803; and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2009/0312730 A1, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • diaper pants may be manufactured with a ring-like elastic belt 104 and provided to consumers in a configuration wherein the front waist region 116 and the back waist region 118 are connected to each other as packaged, prior to being applied to the wearer.
  • diaper pants may have a continuous perimeter waist opening 110 and continuous perimeter leg openings 112 such as shown in FIG. 1 .
  • the ring-like elastic belt may be formed by joining a first elastic belt to a second elastic belt with a permanent side seam or with an openable and reclosable fastening system disposed at or adjacent the laterally opposing sides of the belts.
  • the ring-like elastic belt 104 may be defined by a first elastic belt 106 connected with a second elastic belt 108 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 extends between a first longitudinal side edge 111 a and a second longitudinal side edge 111 b and defines first and second opposing end regions 106 a , 106 b and a central region 106 c .
  • the second elastic 108 belt extends between a first longitudinal side edge 113 a and a second longitudinal side edge 113 b and defines first and second opposing end regions 108 a , 108 b and a central region 108 c .
  • the distance between the first longitudinal side edge 111 a and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b defines the pitch length, PL, of the first elastic belt 106
  • the distance between the first longitudinal side edge 113 a and the second longitudinal side edge 113 b defines the pitch length, PL, of the second elastic belt 108
  • the central region 106 c of the first elastic belt is connected with the first waist region 116 or first end region 116 a of the chassis 102
  • the central region 108 c of the second elastic belt 108 is connected with the second waist region 118 or second end region 118 a of the chassis 102 .
  • the first end region 106 a of the first elastic belt 106 is connected with the first end region 108 a of the second elastic belt 108 at first side seam 178
  • the second end region 106 b of the first elastic belt 106 is connected with the second end region 108 b of the second elastic belt 108 at second side seam 180 to define the ring-like elastic belt 104 as well as the waist opening 110 and leg openings 112 .
  • the first belt 106 and the second belt 108 may be permanently or refastenably connected with each other at the first side seam 178 and the second side seam 180 .
  • the side seams 178 , 180 may comprise a permanent bond, such as a thermal, pressure, or adhesive bond, or may be a releasable bond, such as a mechanical or cohesive fastener.
  • the first elastic belt 106 also defines an outer laterally extending edge 107 a and an inner laterally extending edge 107 b
  • the second elastic belt 108 defines an outer laterally extending edge 109 a and an inner laterally extending edge 109 b
  • the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge 107 b
  • the outer edge 109 a of the second belt 108 is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge 109 b .
  • a perimeter edge 112 a of one leg opening may be defined by portions of the inner laterally extending edge 107 b of the first elastic belt 106 , the inner laterally extending edge 109 b of the second elastic belt 108 , and the first longitudinal or right side edge 128 of the chassis 102 .
  • a perimeter edge 112 b of the other leg opening may be defined by portions of the inner laterally extending edge 107 b , the inner laterally extending edge 109 b , and the second longitudinal or left side edge 130 of the chassis 102 .
  • the outer laterally extending edges 107 a , 109 a may also define the front waist edge 121 and the laterally extending back waist edge 122 of the diaper pant MP.
  • first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may define different sizes and shapes.
  • first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may define curved contours.
  • the inner lateral edges 107 b , 109 b of the first and/or second elastic belts 106 , 108 may include non-linear or curved portions in the first and second opposing end regions.
  • Such curved contours may help define desired shapes to leg opening 112 , such as for example, relatively rounded leg openings.
  • the elastic belts 106 , 108 may include elastic strands 168 that extend along non-linear or curved paths that may correspond with the curved contours of the inner lateral edges 107 b , 109 b.
  • FIG. 2 C shows a configuration wherein the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 both define generally rectangular shapes.
  • the outer laterally extending edge 107 a of the first elastic belt 106 may comprise a lateral width of W1D and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b may comprise a lateral width of W1P, wherein W1D and W1P are equal or substantially equal.
  • the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 may comprise a lateral width of W2D and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b may comprise a lateral width of W2P, wherein W2D and W2P are equal or substantially equal.
  • At least one of the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may comprise lateral edges having different lengths.
  • FIG. 2 D shows a configuration wherein the first elastic belt 106 defines a generally rectangular shape, such as described with reference to FIG. 2 C , and wherein the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b have different lengths.
  • the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 may comprise a lateral width of W2D and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b may comprise a lateral width of W2P, wherein W2D is greater than W2P.
  • both the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may comprise lateral edges having different lengths.
  • FIG. 2 E shows a configuration wherein the outer laterally extending edge 107 a of the first elastic belt 106 and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b have different lengths, and wherein the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b have different lengths. As shown in FIG.
  • the outer laterally extending edge 107 a of the first elastic belt 107 may comprise a lateral width of W1D and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b may comprise a lateral width of W1P, wherein W1D is greater than W1P, and wherein the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 may comprise a lateral width of W2D and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b may comprise a lateral width of W2P, wherein W2D is greater than W2P.
  • the first elastic belt 106 may define a longitudinal length LT1 extending between outer laterally extending edge 107 a and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b
  • the second elastic belt 108 may define a longitudinal length LT2 extending between outer laterally extending edge 109 a and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b
  • LT1 may be equal to LT2.
  • LT1 may be less or greater than LT2.
  • W1D may be equal to W1P, or W1D may be different than W1P.
  • W2D may be equal to W2P, or W2D may be different than W2P.
  • W1D and/or W1P may be equal to or different W2D and/or W2P.
  • the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may also each include a first substrate 162 and a second substrate 164 .
  • the first substrates 162 may be oriented to define at least a portion of a garment facing surface 115 a of the first elastic belt 106 and a garment facing surface 117 a the second elastic belt 108
  • the second substrates 164 may be oriented to define at least a portion of a wearer facing surface 115 b of the first elastic belt 106 and a wearer facing surface 117 b of the second elastic belt 108 .
  • the first substrate 162 may extend from a proximal edge 162 b to a distal edge 162 a for a maximum length L1
  • the second substrate 164 may extend from a proximal edge 164 b to a distal edge 164 a for a maximum length L2.
  • the distal edge 162 a and/or the proximal edge 162 b of the first substrate 162 may be straight and/or curved and/or may be parallel or unparallel to each other.
  • the distal edge 164 a and/or the proximal edge 164 b of the second substrate 164 may be straight and/or curved and/or may be parallel or unparallel to each other.
  • the maximum length L1 refers to the longest distance extending longitudinally between the distal edge 162 a and the proximal edge 162 b of the first substrate 162
  • the maximum length L2 refers to the longest distance extending longitudinally between the distal edge 164 a and the proximal edge 164 b of the second substrate 164 .
  • L1 may be equal to, less than, or greater than L2.
  • L1 may be equal to or less than LT1
  • L2 may be equal to or less than LT2.
  • the distal edge 162 a of the first substrate 162 may define at least a portion of the front waist edge 121 and/or at least a portion of back waist edge 122
  • the distal edge 164 a of the second substrate 164 may define at least a portion of the front waist edge 121 and/or at least a portion of back waist edge 122
  • the distal edge 162 a of the first substrate 162 and/or the distal edge 164 a of the second substrate 164 may define at least a portion of the waist opening 110 .
  • first substrate 162 and/or the second substrate 164 may extend continuously from the first belt 106 to the second belt 108 .
  • the first substrate 162 may be configured to define a continuous outer cover 162 ′ that extends contiguously from the first waist edge 121 to the second waist edge 122 , such as shown in FIGS. 1 A, 2 F, and 3 C .
  • diaper pants 100 P with continuous outer covers, such as shown in FIGS. 1 A, 2 F, and 3 C may also be configured to include various aspects of the frangible pathways and fastener components discussed herein.
  • first substrate 162 and the second substrate 164 may define various lateral widths that may or may not be equal.
  • first substrate 162 may extend laterally between a first longitudinal edge 162 e and a second longitudinal edge 162 f to define a first lateral width W1
  • second substrate 164 may extend laterally between a first longitudinal edge 164 e and a second longitudinal edge 164 f to define a second lateral width W2.
  • the proximal edge 162 b of the first substrate 162 and/or the proximal edge 164 b of the second substrate 164 may extend laterally across the backsheet 136 .
  • the first substrate 162 includes a garment facing surface 162 c and an opposing wearer facing surface 162 d
  • the second substrate 164 includes a garment facing surface 164 c and an opposing wearer facing surface 164 d.
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a folded portion of at least the first substrate 162 and/or the second substrate 164 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 extending longitudinally between a fold line 162 h in the first substrate 162 and a lateral edge 162 i .
  • the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may be connected with the wearer facing surface 164 d of the second substrate 164 .
  • the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may also be connected with and/or overlap the chassis 102 .
  • the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may also be connected with the wearer facing surface 162 d of the first substrate 162 .
  • a portion of the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may be left unbonded to the chassis 102 and/or the second substrate 164 , forming a pocket having an opening oriented toward the lateral centerline 162 c of the chassis 102 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a folded portion of the second substrate 164 extending longitudinally between a fold line in the second substrate 164 and a lateral edge.
  • the folded portion of the second substrate 164 may be connected with the garment facing surface 162 c of the first substrate 162 .
  • a fold line of the first substrate 162 and/or a fold line of the second substrate 164 may define at least a portion of the waist opening 110 .
  • various waist configurations may be utilized.
  • the folded portion 162 g may be sandwiched between the second substrate 164 and the backsheet 136 .
  • the second substrate 164 may be sandwiched between the folded portion 162 g and the backsheet 136 .
  • FIGS. 3 A 1 and 3 A 2 show configurations of the first belt 106 , it is to be appreciated that such configurations may be applied with the second belt 108 .
  • first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may comprise the same materials and/or may have the same structure. In some embodiments, the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt may comprise different materials and/or may have different structures. It should also be appreciated that components of the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 , such as the first substrate 162 , and/or second substrate 164 may be constructed from various materials.
  • the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162 , and/or second substrate 164 that may be manufactured from materials such as plastic films; apertured plastic films; woven or nonwoven webs of natural materials (e.g., wood or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers (e.g., polyolefins, polyamides, polyester, polyethylene, or polypropylene fibers) or a combination of natural and/or synthetic fibers; or coated woven or nonwoven webs.
  • the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162 , and/or second substrate 164 comprising a nonwoven web of synthetic fibers and may include a stretchable nonwoven.
  • the first and second elastic belts may include an inner hydrophobic, non-stretchable nonwoven material and an outer hydrophobic, non-stretchable nonwoven material. It is to be appreciated that the belts may configured in various ways, such as disclosed for example, in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2022/0142828 A1 and Chinese Patent Application No. CN2021/077843, which are both incorporated by reference herein.
  • One or more substrates of the belt may include fibers.
  • the characteristics of these fibers may be the same or different in the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the belt. Further, the characteristics of these fibers may be present in one or more the substrate layers forming the belt.
  • Those fibers may be spunbond, carded, wet-laid, meltblown, hydroentangled, hydrojetted, or otherwise processed as is known in the art.
  • the nonwoven may be a composite material such as a spunbond-meltblown-spunbond (SMS) material.
  • SMS spunbond-meltblown-spunbond
  • at least one of the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the substrate may comprise a carded nonwoven material.
  • At least one of the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the belt may comprise a substrate having a plurality of fibers that are hydroentangled or have undergone a hydrojetting process. Additionally, the substrate may include a plurality of fibers having a denier or less than about 1.5 or less than about 1.3 or less than about 1.2 or less than about 1, specifically reciting all 0.1 increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the fibers of the substrates of the present disclosure may comprise mono-component fibers or multi-component fibers, such as bi-component fibers or tri-component fibers, for example.
  • Multi-component fibers means fibers comprising more than one chemical species or material (i.e., multi-constituent fibers).
  • the fibers may comprise petroleum sourced resins, recycled resins, and/or bio-sourced resins, such as polylactic acid from Nature Works, polyethylene and/or polypropylene from Braskem, and polybutylene terephthalate from Lanxess.
  • the fibers may have round, triangular, tri-lobal, or otherwise shaped cross-sections, for example.
  • the multi-component fibers such as bi-component fibers, may comprise sheath/core, side-by-side, islands in the sea, and/or eccentric configurations or may have other configurations.
  • fibers comprising a core/sheath configuration may be comprised of a first polymer forming the core of the fiber, and a second polymer partially or completely surrounding the first polymer and forming the sheath of the fiber.
  • the substrate may comprise a polypropylene-polyethylene side by side bicomponent fibers.
  • the fibers of the substrates of the present disclosure may comprise crimped fibers. These crimped fibers may be included in at least one of the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the belt. Crimped fibers may result when the different polymer components of multi-component fibers have different melting temperatures, viscosities, glass transition temperatures, crystallinities, and/or crystallization rates, and are disposed in an eccentric sheath/core or side-by-side configuration within the fibers. As the multi-component fibers cool after formation, a first polymer component may solidify and/or shrink at a faster rate than a second polymer component while the second polymer component may have sufficient rigidity to resist compression along a longitudinal fiber axis.
  • the continuous fibers may deform and curl up when strain on the fiber is relieved, thereby causing what is known as “crimp” in the fibers. Crimp of the fibers aids in the softness and loft of a nonwoven web, which is consumer desirable. Additional details for fibers suitable for inclusion in the substrates discussed herein is disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2020/0337910, which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • Elastic material 167 may be positioned between the wearer facing surface 162 d of the first substrate 162 and the garment facing surface 164 c of the second substrate 164 . It is to be appreciated that the elastic material 167 may include one or more elastic elements such as strands, ribbons, elastic films, or panels extending along the lengths of the elastic belts. As shown in FIGS. 2 A and 3 , the elastic material 167 may include a plurality of elastic strands 168 .
  • the elastic material 167 may be an elastic film used to form a zero-strain elastic laminate comprising an elastic film bonded to one or more nonwoven layers and subsequently subjected to mechanical deformation or activation sufficient to weaken the nonwoven layer(s) and enable the laminate to stretch and recover elastically.
  • first substrate 162 , second substrate 164 , and/or elastic material 167 of the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may be bonded together and/or with other components, such as the chassis 102 , with adhesive and/or mechanical bonds. It is to be appreciated that adhesive and mechanical bonding methods may be utilized alone or in combination with each other.
  • adhesive may be applied to at least one of the first substrate 162 , second substrate 164 , and/or elastic material 167 when being combined to form the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 .
  • mechanical bonding devices may apply mechanical bonds to the to at least one of the first substrate 162 , second substrate 164 , and/or elastic material 167 when being combined to form the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 .
  • Such mechanical bonds may be applied with heat, pressure, and/or ultrasonic devices.
  • mechanical bonding devices may apply bonds that bond the first substrate 162 , second substrate 164 , and/or elastic material 167 together and/or may act to trap or immobilize discrete lengths of the contracted elastic strands in the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 .
  • first substrate 162 , second substrate 164 , and/or elastic material 167 may be bonded together with various methods and apparatuses to create various elastomeric laminates, such as described in U.S. Patent Publication Nos.
  • components of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may be assembled in various ways and various combinations to create various desirable features that may differ along the lateral width and/or longitudinal length of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 .
  • Such features may include, for example, Dtex values, bond patterns, aperture arrangements, elastic positioning, Average Dtex values, Average Pre-Strain values, rugosity frequencies, rugosity wavelengths, height values, and/or contact area.
  • differing features may be imparted to various components, such as for example, the first substrate 162 , second substrate 164 , and elastic material 167 before and/or during stages of assembly of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 .
  • first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include various configurations of belt elastic materials 167 arranged in relation to each other and to the first substrate 162 , and the second substrate 164 .
  • the elastic material 167 may include configurations of one or more elastic elements such as strands, ribbons, films, or panels positioned in various arrangements.
  • the elastic material 167 may comprise various elastics, elastic features and arrangements, and processes for assembly, such as described in 2018/0168889 A1; 2018/0168874 A1; 2018/0168875 A1; 2018/0168890 A1; 2018/0168887 A1; 2018/0168892 A1; 2018/0168876 A1; 2018/0168891 A1; 2019/0298586 A1; 2019/0070042 A1; 2018/0168878 A1; 2018/0168877 A1; 2018/0168880 A1; 2018/0170027 A1; 2018/0169964 A1; 2018/0168879 A1; 2018/0170026 A1; 2019/0070041 A1; 2021/0282797A1; and 2021/0275362 A1, which are all incorporated by reference. It is also to be appreciated the elastic materials 167 herein may be configured with identical or different colors in various different locations on the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt
  • the elastic material 167 may be configured as elastic strands 168 disposed at a constant interval in the longitudinal direction. In other embodiments, the elastic strands 168 may be disposed at different intervals in the longitudinal direction. In some configurations, the Dtex values of the elastic strands 168 may be constant or varied along the longitudinal direction. In some configurations, the elastic material 167 in a stretched condition may be interposed and joined between uncontracted substrate layers. When the elastic material 167 is relaxed, the elastic material 167 returns to an unstretched condition and contracts the substrate layers. The elastic material 167 may provide a desired variation of contraction force in the area of the ring-like elastic belt.
  • the chassis 102 and elastic belts 106 , 108 may be configured in different ways other than as depicted in attached Figures.
  • the elastic material 167 may be joined to the substrates continuously or intermittently along the interface between the elastic material 167 and the substrates.
  • the elastic strands 168 may be in the form of extruded elastic strands, which may also be bonded with the first substrate 162 and/or second substrate 164 in a pre-corrugated configuration, such as disclosed for example in U.S. Pat. No. 5,681,302, which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • the elastic material 167 discussed herein may be in the form of elastic strands 168 .
  • the elastic strands 168 may be parallel with each other and/or with the lateral axis 126 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may be configured to include various quantities of elastic strands 168 .
  • elastic strands 168 may be grouped in pairs.
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may comprise from about 10 to about 1500 elastic strands 168 .
  • elastic strands 168 herein may comprise various Dtex values, strand spacing values, and pre-strain values and such elastic strands 168 may utilized with other elastic strands to create first and second elastic belts 106 , 108 comprising elastic strands 168 in various combinations of Dtex values, strand spacing values, and pre-strain values.
  • the Average-Dtex of one or more elastic strands 168 may be greater than 500.
  • the Average-Dtex of one or more elastic strands 168 may be from about 10 to about 1500, specifically reciting all 1 Dtex increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • a plurality of elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than or equal to 4 mm. In some configurations, a plurality of elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm, specifically reciting all 0.01 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. In some configurations, a plurality of elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing of greater than 4 mm.
  • the Average-Pre-Strain of each of a plurality of elastic strands may be from about 50% to about 400%, specifically reciting all 1% increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the elastic strands 168 comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm and an Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500.
  • the elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%.
  • a first plurality of elastic strands may comprise a first Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%, and a second plurality of elastic strands may comprise a second Average-Pre-Strain that is greater than first Average-Pre-Strain.
  • a first plurality of elastic strands comprises an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm and an Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500; and a second plurality of elastic strands may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing greater than about 4 mm and an Average-Dtex greater than about 450.
  • the elastic strands 168 may be referred to herein as outer waist elastics 170 and inner waist elastics 172 .
  • Elastic strands 168 such as the outer waist elastics 170 , may continuously extend laterally between the first and second opposing end regions 106 a , 106 b of the first elastic belt 106 and between the first and second opposing end regions 108 a , 108 b of the second elastic belt 108 .
  • Some elastic strands 168 such as the inner waist elastics 172 , may be configured with discontinuities in areas, such as for example, where the first and second elastic belts 106 , 108 overlap portions of the chassis 102 , such as the absorbent assembly 140 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may be configured with low-stretch zones 701 and high-stretch zones 703 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a first high-stretch zone 703 a and a second high-stretch zone 703 b separated laterally by a low-stretch zone 701 .
  • Portions of the chassis 102 such as the backsheet 136 and absorbent assembly 140 , may be connected with the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 in the low-stretch zones 701 in the first waist region 116 and/or the second waist region 118 .
  • the high-stretch zones 703 are elasticated by the elastic material 167 , such as the elastic strands 168 , 172 ; and the low-stretch zones 701 may comprise cut lines separating the elastic material 167 , such as the elastic strands 168 , 172 .
  • the elastic material 167 may be cut in an unbonded region where the elastic material is not bonded with first substrate 162 and the second substrate 164 . Thus, the elastic material 167 retracts from the unbonded region and form low-stretch zone 701 .
  • the elastic material 167 may be cut into several discrete pieces.
  • the low-stretch zones 701 define regions of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 that have relatively less elasticity than the high-stretch zones 703 .
  • the discrete elastic material 167 that has been cut and which are elastically contracted do not add any substantial amount of elastication to the low-stretch zone 701 .
  • the high-stretch zones 703 will elongate more than the low-stretch zones 701 .
  • the terms “elastic,” “elastomer” or “elastomeric” refers to materials exhibiting elastic properties, which include any material that upon application of a force to its relaxed, initial length can stretch or elongate to an elongated length more than 10% greater than its initial length and will substantially recover back to about its initial length upon release of the applied force.
  • the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may be configured with high-stretch zones 703 that are elastic and may be configured with low-stretch zones 701 that are not elastic or “inelastic.”
  • the diaper pants 100 P described with reference to FIGS. 1 - 3 C may include one or more frangible pathways in the first belt 106 and/or the second belt 108 .
  • FIGS. 4 , 5 A, and 5 B show an example diaper pant 100 P with a first belt 106 that includes frangible pathways 700 .
  • the frangible pathways 700 may be configured to allow the first elastic belt 106 to be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway 700 , such as when removing the diaper pant 100 P from a wearer.
  • FIG. 5 A shows a view of the diaper pant 100 P from FIG.
  • FIG. 4 illustrating the first belt 106 after having been torn along the frangible pathway 700 through both the outer longitudinal outer laterally extending edge 107 a and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 shown in FIG. 5 A is separated by opposing tear lines 705 .
  • the first elastic belt 106 may be torn along both frangible pathways 700 in FIG. 5 A .
  • FIG. 5 B shows the diaper pant of FIG. 4 showing the front belt having been torn along two frangible pathways 700 .
  • the central region 106 c of the first elastic belt 106 may remain bonded with the chassis 102 after separating the first and second opposing end regions 106 a , 106 b from the central region 106 c by tearing the elastic belt 106 along the frangible pathways 700 .
  • the frangible pathways 700 may comprise a plurality of lines of weakness 704 configured such that all elastic strands 168 in the first elastic belt 106 are severed at least once in the frangible pathway 700 . Severing the elastic strands 168 in the frangible pathway 700 helps make it relatively easier to tear the first elastic belt 106 along the frangible pathway 700 . For example, when the elastic strands 168 are severed, the first substrate 162 and second substrate 164 of the first elastic belt 106 need only need to be torn without having to also tear uncut elastic strands 168 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P may include various quantities of frangible pathways 700 that may be: positioned in various locations; define various shapes; and extend for various lengths.
  • the first elastic belt 106 may comprise a first belt length defined by a longitudinal distance between the proximal edge 107 b and the distal edge 107 a
  • the frangible pathway 700 may extend for a total length from an outermost edge of a line of weakness 704 nearest the proximal edge 107 b of the first belt 106 to an outermost edge of a line of weakness 704 nearest the distal edge 107 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the frangible pathway 700 may extend for a total length that is greater than, equal to, or less than the first belt length.
  • the lines of weakness 704 may extend for a length from a first end to a second end, and a sum of the all the lengths of lines of weakness 704 in the frangible pathway 700 may be greater than the frangible pathway total length.
  • diaper pants 100 P may be configured such that one or both of the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 include one or more frangible pathways 700 .
  • the frangible pathways 700 may be positioned in various locations on the first and second elastic belts 106 , 108 .
  • frangible pathways 700 may extend to overlap with the chassis 102 .
  • the frangible pathways 700 may extend in straight lines and/or may be curved and/or have curved portions.
  • the frangible pathways 700 may extend longitudinally for the entire length or less than the entire length of the first belt 106 and/or second belt 108 .
  • frangible pathways 700 may be positioned partially or entirely laterally between the first and second side seams 178 , 180 and the chassis 102 .
  • the frangible pathways 700 may be configured and/or positioned to provide access to and/or function with other features, such as disposal features.
  • the diaper pant 100 P shown in FIGS. 4 , 5 A, and 5 B includes fastener components 707 positioned on the wearing facing surface 115 b of the first elastic belt 106 .
  • the fastener components 707 may be positioned between the first elastic belt 106 and the chassis 102 .
  • the fastener component 707 may be configured to refastenably connect with other portions of the diaper pant 100 P, such as for example, the garment facing surfaces of the first elastic belt 106 , the second elastic belt 108 , or the chassis 102 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P may be removed from a wearer and rolled or folded up for disposal, and the fastener component 707 may be connected with another portion of the diaper pant 100 P to help maintain the diaper pant 100 P in a disposal configuration.
  • the fastener component 707 may be configured in various ways, such as hooks, loops, and/or adhesive.
  • the fastener component 707 may comprise hook elements or adhesive adapted to refastenably connect with another surface of the diaper pant 100 P.
  • the fastener component 707 may comprise loop elements adapted to refastenably connect with hook surface on the diaper pant 100 P.
  • the fastener component 707 may be a separate element connected with the elastic belt 106 in various ways, such as mechanical bonding, adhesive bonding, or both.
  • the fastener component 707 may be integrally formed from materials of the elastic belt 106 , 108 .
  • the fastener component 707 may be printed and/or comprise materials of various different colors such that the fastener component 707 may be visible from outside the diaper pant 100 P.
  • the fastener component 707 may comprise a hook material that can refastenably engage with substrates, such as nonwovens for example, on an exterior surface of the diaper pant 100 P.
  • the fastener component 707 may comprise a substrate comprising hooks, with the substrate bonded to the elastic belt 106 , 108 , such as the second substrate 164 , which may be in the form of a nonwoven.
  • the substrate may be bonded to the elastic belt 106 , 108 in various ways, such as for example, with mechanical bonds, thermal bonds, ultrasonic bonds, and/or adhesive bonds or combinations thereof.
  • hooks may be integrally formed from the second substrate 164 , which may be in the form of a nonwoven.
  • the fastener component 707 may comprise one material or a combination of two or more materials arranged in at least partially overlapping configuration. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may comprise other fastener types as known in the art.
  • the fastener component 707 may comprise any of a wide variety of shapes, including rectangles or other polygons, circles, ovals, shapes having exterior convexities or concavities or combinations thereof, or one or a plurality of lines or geometric shapes forming an array. It is to be appreciated that the fastener component 707 may comprise various sizes. For example, in some configurations, the fastener component 707 may have a lateral width of between about 5 mm and about 100 mm, specifically reciting all 0.1 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the fastener component 707 may have a longitudinal length of between about 10 mm and about 100 mm, specifically reciting all 0.1 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the fastener component 707 may be aligned parallel the lateral centerline 126 a , 126 b of the elastic belt 106 , 108 or may be oriented at an angle relative the longitudinal centerline 126 a , 126 of the elastic belt 106 , 108 of between 0 and 90 degrees.
  • the fastener component 707 may comprise an array of two or more spaced-apart fastening elements.
  • the fastener component 707 may have a color that is visible through any layers of the elastic belt 106 , 108 on which the fastener component 707 is located.
  • the elastic belt 106 , 108 and/or chassis 102 may include printing or other indicia highlighting to a caregiver the location, function, and/or usage of the fastener component 707 .
  • the bond, or bond pattern, attaching the fastener component 707 to the elastic belt 106 , 108 may be visually or tactilely distinct from the surrounding belt material in order to provide the caregiver a signal or a mechanical grip advantage.
  • the frangible pathways 700 may comprise lines of weakness 704 that are: configured in various ways; positioned in various locations and orientations relative to each other; defined by various shapes; and extending for various lengths.
  • the lines of weakness 704 may comprise discrete cut lines that penetrate through some or all the layers of the elastic belt 106 .
  • the lines of weakness 704 comprise discrete bonds wherein materials of the first substrate and the second substrate are fused together.
  • the lines of weakness 704 may be linear, curvilinear, or have a regular or irregular geometry and may comprise one or more of a perforation, a bond, an aperture, or a mechanically thinned region of a material such as a nonwoven, or a combination thereof. It is also to be appreciated that the lines of weakness 704 can be formed with different lengths and spacings to achieve different separation forces.
  • absorbent articles 100 such as diaper pants 100 P, may be configured with frangible pathways 700 comprising lines of weakness 704 arranged in various ways to help improve a caregiver's ability to remove a soiled diaper pant 100 P from a wearer without having to remove a soiled diaper pant from a wearer by sliding the soiled diaper pant down the wearer's legs.
  • the frangible pathways 700 may be configured to allow the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 to be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway 700 , such as when removing the diaper pant 100 P from a wearer.
  • frangible pathways 700 may also be configured to provide access to fastener components 707 that may be used to help hold a soiled product in a disposal configuration.
  • fastener components 707 may be used to help hold a soiled product in a disposal configuration.
  • frangible pathways 700 may also be configured to provide access to fastener components 707 that may be used to help hold a soiled product in a disposal configuration.
  • the following provides a discussion of example implementations of frangible pathways 700 on diaper pants 100 P in the context of the above description of various details of absorbent articles 100 , fastener components 707 , frangible pathways 700 , and lines weakness 704 . It is to be appreciated that discussions of frangible pathways 700 in the first elastic belt 106 herein may also apply to frangible pathways 700 in the second elastic belt 108 .
  • frangible pathways 700 may be positioned in various locations and/or orientations relative to other components of the absorbent article 100 and/or may be configured to function in various ways to help facilitate removal of diaper pant from a wearer.
  • the diaper pant 100 P shown in FIGS. 6 A and 6 B may include one or more frangible pathways 700 extending between a distal terminus 808 on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 and a proximal terminus 810 on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P includes a first frangible pathway 700 a and a second frangible pathway 700 b in the first belt 106 .
  • the first frangible pathway 700 a may extend between a first distal terminus 808 a on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 and a first proximal terminus 810 a on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the second frangible pathway 700 b may extend between a second distal terminus 808 b on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 and a second proximal terminus 810 b on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the first and second frangible pathways 700 a , 700 b may comprise lines of weakness 704 as described above.
  • first distal terminus 808 a and the second distal terminus 808 b may be located in various lateral positions on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 .
  • first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned in the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 .
  • first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 .
  • first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned in the first end region 106 a and/or the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106 . In some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally outboard of the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 .
  • first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first side seam 178 and/or may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second side seam 180 .
  • the first distal terminus 808 a may be laterally aligned with the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 or the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the first distal terminus 808 a may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the second distal terminus 808 b may be laterally aligned with the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 or the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106 . In some configurations, the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106 .
  • first proximal terminus 810 a and the second proximal terminus 810 b may be located in various lateral positions on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned in the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 .
  • first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second distal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 .
  • first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned in the first end region 106 a and/or the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106 . In some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally outboard of the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 .
  • the first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first side seam 178 and/or may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second side seam 180 .
  • the first proximal terminus 810 a may be laterally aligned with the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 or the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the first proximal terminus 810 a may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the second proximal terminus 810 b may be laterally aligned with the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 or the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106 . In some configurations, the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106 .
  • first distal terminus 808 a and the second distal terminus 808 b may be located in various longitudinal positions between the outer edge 107 a and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • first proximal terminus 810 a and the second proximal terminus 810 b may be located in various longitudinal positions between the outer edge 107 a and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the first proximal terminus 810 a may be located on the first side seam 178 at positions longitudinally inboard of the outer edge 107 a and longitudinally outboard of the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the second distal terminus 808 b and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be located on the second side seam 180 at positions longitudinally inboard of the outer edge 107 a and longitudinally outboard of the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • completing the tearing process of the first belt 106 may also require tearing portions of the first and/or second side seams 178 , 180 .
  • the first belt 106 may also comprise grip regions 801 providing a place where a user may grasp a portion of the first belt 106 and begin the process of tearing the first belt along the frangible pathway 700 .
  • the grip region 801 may comprise an accessibility opening 802 in the first belt 106 and may also comprise a fastener component 707 positioned adjacent the accessibility opening 802 .
  • the accessibility opening 802 may comprise slits and/or openings in the first belt 106 and may penetrate through some or all layers of the first belt 106 . It is to be appreciated that such slits or openings may be curved and/or straight.
  • the accessibility opening 802 may also be considered part of the frangible pathway 700 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P may include a first grip region 801 a including a first accessibility opening 802 a and second grip region 801 b including a second accessibility opening 802 b in the first belt 106 .
  • the first and second accessibility openings 802 a , 802 b may be positioned between the outer edge 107 a and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the first and second accessibility openings 802 a , 802 b may also be positioned in the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and may be positioned between the first longitudinal edge 128 , the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 , and the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102 .
  • a first fastener component 707 a may be positioned adjacent the first accessibility opening 802 a
  • a second fastener component 707 a may be positioned adjacent the second accessibility opening 802 a
  • the first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a first tear zone 813 a extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to the first distal terminus 808 a and a second tear zone 813 b extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to the first proximal terminus 810 a .
  • the second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a first tear zone 813 a extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to the second distal terminus 808 b and a second tear zone 813 b extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to the second proximal terminus 810 b.
  • the frangible pathways 700 may comprise one or more functional zones.
  • the frangible pathways may comprise transition zones that may operatively connect such zones to help facilitate propagation of a tear along the frangible pathway 700 from one zone to another zone.
  • the lines of weakness in the transition zones may be of particular lengths and/or angles relative to lateral centerlines and row spacing to help provide desired propagation of material failure when, for example, removing a product from a wearer. It is to be appreciated that the lengths, angles, and spacings in transition zones may be different from those in adjacent lines of weakness.
  • the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a first initial tear zone 815 a extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to a first transition zone 817 a .
  • the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a first secondary tear zone 819 a extending from the first transition zone 817 a to the first distal terminus 808 a .
  • the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may also comprise a second initial tear zone 815 b extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to a second transition zone 817 b .
  • first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a second secondary tear zone 819 b extending from the second transition zone 817 b to the first proximal terminus 810 a .
  • the first transition zone 817 a may operatively connect the first initial tear zone 815 a with the first secondary tear zone 819 a to help facilitate the propagation of the tear along the first frangible pathway 700 a from first initial tear zone 815 a to the first secondary tear zone 819 a .
  • the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a first initial tear zone 815 a extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to a first transition zone 817 a .
  • the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a secondary tear zone 819 a extending from the first transition zone 817 a to the second distal terminus 808 b .
  • the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may also comprise a second initial tear zone 815 b extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to a second transition zone 817 b .
  • first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a second secondary tear zone 819 b extending from the second transition zone 817 b to the second proximal terminus 810 b .
  • the second transition zone 817 b may operatively connect the second initial tear zone 815 b with the second secondary tear zone 819 b to help facilitate the propagation of the tear along the second frangible pathway 700 b from second initial tear zone 815 b to the second secondary tear zone 819 b.
  • the accessibility opening 802 may help provide a caregiver or wearer access to and/or to grasp the fastener component 707 in the grip region 801 with a finger or thumb. The caregiver or user may then pull on grip region 801 to begin tearing the first belt 106 on the frangible pathway 700 .
  • tear lines may simultaneously propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b laterally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 toward the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P may also be configured such that a tear line propagating along the first tear zone 813 a and a tear line propagating along the second tear zone 813 b may reach the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810 , respectively, simultaneously or approximately simultaneously.
  • some diaper pants 100 P herein may be configured to include a frangible pathway 700 that extends through or around the fastener component 707 without an accessibility opening.
  • a user may pinch and/or pull the belt where the frangible pathway 700 is located at or adjacent the fastener component 707 to initiate the tearing process along the frangible pathway 700 .
  • the frangible pathways 700 may be configured to extend laterally inward from the from the distal terminus 808 and/or the proximal terminus 810 .
  • portions of the frangible pathway 700 may extend to define an angle that is less than 90 degrees with respect to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • Portions of the frangible pathway may extend to define an angle that is less than about 90 degrees, or less than about 80 degrees, or less than about 75 degrees, or less than about 65 degrees, or less than about 45 degrees, or less than about 35 degrees, or less than about 25 degrees with respect to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the frangible pathway may define an overall length that is greater than a longitudinal length LT1 of the first belt 106 and/or the longitudinal length LT2 of the second belt 108 discussed above with reference to FIGS. 2 C- 2 E .
  • first elastic belt 106 and/or the second belt 108 may be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway 700 , such as when removing the diaper pant 100 P from a wearer.
  • first belt 106 may be separable along the first frangible pathway 700 a and the second frangible pathway 700 b to define a first belt zone 831 , a second belt zone 832 , and a third belt zone 833 positioned laterally between the first and second belt zones 831 , 832 .
  • a user when removing a diaper pant 100 P from a wearer, a user may grab the first belt 106 in the grip region 801 by inserting one or more fingers and/or a thumb through the accessibility opening 802 to grasp a portion of the first belt 106 and fastener component 707 .
  • a caregiver may insert a finger or thumb through the first accessibility opening 802 a and grasp the first belt 106 and the first fastener component 707 a with a first hand.
  • the caregiver's opposing second hand may be used to help stabilize the wearer.
  • the caregiver's opposing second hand may apply a holding or stabilizing force to the wearer at the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 .
  • the user's first hand may then exert a pulling force Fp on the first grip region 801 a of the first belt 106 outward away from the wearer to initiate a tearing of the first belt 106 along the first frangible pathway 700 a , such as shown in FIG. 6 C .
  • a pulling force Fp (generally represented by an arrow) may be applied to the first grip region 801 a in a direction generally toward the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106 and the wearer.
  • a first tear line 705 a and a second tear line 705 b may simultaneously propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b , respectively.
  • the first tear line 705 a may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a along the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the first fastener component 707 a and then in a direction D1 that is generally laterally and longitudinally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first distal terminus 808 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the first fastener component 707 a along the second tear zone 813 b of the first frangible pathway 700 a in a direction D2 that is generally laterally outward and longitudinally inward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first proximal terminus 810 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the first tear line 705 a may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a along the first initial tear zone 815 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a to the first transition zone 817 a . From the first transition zone 817 a , the first tear line 705 a may then propagate along the first secondary tear zone 819 a to the first distal terminus 808 a . In addition, the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a along the second initial tear zone 815 b of the first frangible pathway 700 a to the second transition zone 817 b .
  • the second tear line 705 b may then propagate along the second secondary tear zone 819 b to the first proximal terminus 810 a .
  • the first frangible pathway 700 a may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may reach first distal terminus 808 a and the first proximal terminus 810 a , respectively, at the same time or about the same time.
  • the first belt 106 may be separable along the first frangible pathway 700 a to define a first belt zone 831 .
  • the first belt zone 831 may be formed once the first tear line 705 a propagates through the first distal terminus 808 a and the second tear line 705 b propagates through to the first proximal terminus 810 a , the first belt zone 831 may be formed.
  • a first edge 831 a of the first belt zone 831 is formed by tearing the first frangible pathway 700 a .
  • a first edge 833 a of the third belt zone 833 discussed in more detail below is also formed by tearing the first frangible pathway 700 a .
  • the first belt zone 831 may extend from the first edge 831 a of the first and second tear lines 705 a , 705 b to the first side seam 178 or the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the first belt zone 831 may include the first fastener component 707 a .
  • the first belt zone 831 may include the entirety of or a portion of first fastener component 707 a.
  • a user may proceed to define the second belt zone 832 by tearing the first belt 106 along the second frangible pathway 700 b .
  • a caregiver may insert a finger or thumb through the second accessibility opening 802 b and grasp the first belt 106 and the second fastener component 707 b with a first hand.
  • the caregiver's opposing second hand may be used to help stabilize the wearer.
  • the caregiver's opposing second hand may apply a holding or stabilizing force to the wearer at the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 .
  • the user's first hand may then exert a pulling force Fp on the second grip region 801 b of the first belt 106 outward away from the wearer to initiate a tearing of the first belt 106 along the second frangible pathway 700 b , such as shown in FIG. 6 E .
  • a pulling force Fp (generally represented by an arrow) is applied to the second grip region 801 b in a direction generally toward the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106 .
  • a first tear line 705 a and a second tear line 705 b may simultaneously propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b , respectively.
  • the first tear line 705 a may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b along the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the second fastener component 707 b and then in a direction D1 that is generally laterally and longitudinally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the second distal terminus 808 b in the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the second fastener component 707 b along the second tear zone 813 b of the second frangible pathway 700 b in a direction D2 that is generally laterally outward and longitudinally inward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the second proximal terminus 810 b in the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the first tear line 705 a may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b along the first initial tear zone 815 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b to the first transition zone 817 a . From the first transition zone 817 a , the first tear line 705 a may then propagate along the first secondary tear zone 819 a to the second distal terminus 808 b . In addition, the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b along the second initial tear zone 815 b of the second frangible pathway 700 b to the second transition zone 817 b .
  • the second tear line 705 b may then propagate along the second secondary tear zone 819 b to the second proximal terminus 810 b .
  • the second frangible pathway 700 b may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may reach second distal terminus 808 b and the second proximal terminus 810 b , respectively, at the same time or about the same time.
  • the first belt 106 may be separable along the second frangible pathway 700 b to define a second belt zone 832 and a third belt zone 833 .
  • the second belt zone 832 may be formed once the first tear line 705 a propagates through the second distal terminus 808 b and the second tear line 705 b propagates through to the second proximal terminus 810 b , the second belt zone 832 may be formed.
  • a first edge 832 a of the second belt zone 832 is formed by tearing the second frangible pathway 700 b .
  • a second edge 833 b of the third belt zone 833 is also formed by tearing the second frangible pathway 700 b .
  • the second belt zone 832 may extend from the first edge 832 a of the first and second tear lines 705 a , 705 b to the second side seam 180 or the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the second belt zone 832 may include the second fastener component 707 b .
  • the third belt zone 833 may extend laterally between the first edge 833 a and the second edge 833 b and may remain connected with the chassis 102 .
  • first belt 106 may be torn along second frangible pathway 700 b to define the second belt zone 832 before tearing the first belt 106 along the first frangible pathway 700 a to define the first belt zone 831 .
  • first belt 106 may be torn simultaneously along the first frangible pathway 700 a and the second frangible pathway 700 b to define the first belt zone 831 , the second belt zone 832 , and the third belt zone 833 .
  • the diaper pant 100 P may be removed from a wearer in a manner similar to that of a conventional taped diaper. After being removed from a wearer, the diaper pant 100 P may be placed in a disposal configuration.
  • frangible pathways 700 may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may propagate to reach the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810 , respectively, simultaneously or approximately simultaneously.
  • Such simultaneous tear propagation and tear termination may help provide a caregiver with a convenient and confident diaper pant removal experience.
  • the pulling force needed to complete the tearing may be reduced.
  • the reduction of force may cause the caregiver to believe the tearing is completed and to stop the tearing process before completion. As such, the caregiver may need to initiate a second tearing motion to complete the tearing process.
  • the frangible pathways 700 may comprise individual lines of weakness 704 .
  • a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the first tear zone 813 a may be equal to or substantially equal to a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the second tear zone 813 b .
  • a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the first tear zone 813 a may be different from a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the second tear zone 813 b .
  • the sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the first tear zone 813 a may be different from a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the second tear zone 813 b by from about 1% to about 10%.
  • frangible pathways 700 may be configured with first and second tear zones 813 a , 813 b wherein first and second tear lines 705 a , 705 b propagate through the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810 , respectively.
  • frangible pathways 700 may be configured with first and second tear zones 813 a , 813 b wherein the first tear line 705 a or the second tear line 705 b may propagate through the distal terminus 808 or the proximal terminus 810 , respectively, before the other.
  • frangible pathways 700 may be configured with an accessibility opening 802 , a first tear zone 813 a , and a second tear zone 813 b arranged such that the lengths of the first and second tear zones may not be equal or substantially equal, such as shown for example in FIGS. 7 A and 7 B .
  • 7 A and 7 B may be configured to be operated with a two step tearing process that comprises a first step of tearing the belt along first and second initial tear zones 815 a , 815 b to the first and second transition zones 817 a , 817 b , and then subsequently and simultaneously tearing first and second secondary tear zones 819 a , 819 b from the first and second transition zones 817 a , 817 b to the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810 , respectively.
  • a user may grab the first belt 106 in the grip region 801 by inserting one or more fingers and/or a thumb through the accessibility opening 802 to grasp a portion of the first belt 106 and fastener component 707 .
  • a caregiver may insert a finger or thumb through the first accessibility opening 802 a and grasp the first belt 106 and the first fastener component 707 a with a first hand.
  • the caregiver's opposing second hand may be used to help stabilize the wearer, as discussed above.
  • the user's first hand may then exert an initial tear force Fit (generally represented by a curved arrow) on the first grip region 801 a of the first belt 106 outward away from the wearer to initiate a tearing of the first belt 106 along the first initial tear zone 815 a and the second initial tear zone 815 b , such as shown in FIG. 7 C .
  • an initial tear force Fit (generally represented by a curved arrow) on the first grip region 801 a of the first belt 106 outward away from the wearer to initiate a tearing of the first belt 106 along the first initial tear zone 815 a and the second initial tear zone 815 b , such as shown in FIG. 7 C .
  • a first tear line 705 a may propagate from the accessibility opening 802 along the first initial tear zone 815 a in longitudinal and lateral directions around the first fastener component 707 a and then to the first transition zone 817 a , such as shown in FIGS. 7 C and 7 D .
  • a pulling force Fp (generally represented by an arrow) may be applied to the first grip region 801 a in a direction generally toward the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106 and the wearer.
  • the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may simultaneously propagate along the first secondary tear zone 819 a and the second secondary tear zone 819 b , respectively.
  • the first tear line 705 a may propagate from the first transition zone 817 a along the first secondary tear zone 819 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a in a direction D1 that is generally laterally and longitudinally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first distal terminus 808 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the second transition zone 817 b along the second secondary tear zone 819 b of the first frangible pathway 700 a in a direction D2 that is generally laterally outward and longitudinally inward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first proximal terminus 810 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the second frangible pathway 700 b may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may reach second distal terminus 808 b and the second proximal terminus 810 b , respectively, at the same time or about the same time.
  • the frangible pathways 700 may be configured in various different ways with various zones having different lengths.
  • the belt may comprise one or more substrates and the frangible pathway may extend through each of the one or more substrates, and the frangible pathway extending through two or more substrates forming the belt may be aligned, such that the frangible pathway of the first substrate is aligned with the frangible pathway of the second substrate.
  • the frangible pathways extending through two or more substrates forming the belt may not be aligned or is partially aligned, such that at least a portion of the frangible pathway of the first substrate is offset with the frangible pathway of the second substrate.
  • the pulling force Fp may be applied in a direction generally toward the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106 and the wearer.
  • a first tear line 705 a and a second tear line 705 b may propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b , respectively.
  • the tear could propagate in an unintended tear direction UTD, such as indicated in FIG. 8 A .
  • An unintended tear direction UTD is any tearing of the belt other than along the frangible pathway when the user is attempting to tear along the frangible pathway. It is to be appreciated that this tearing may occur in one or more layers of the belt. If the tear were to propagate in the unintended tear direction UTD rather than along the frangible pathway, this would adversely interfere with the removal of the absorbent article. For example, if one frangible pathway tears significantly before the other because a portion of the tear extends into a portion of the belt rather than along the frangible pathway, the caregiver may sense or feel a change in force, and thus, may stop the tearing motion, assuming the tear along both tear zones is complete.
  • the caregiver may have to re-grip the belt and complete the tear of the incompletely torn frangible pathway in a separate step.
  • Such starting, stopping, and restarting the tearing process may require the user utilize both hands and may require additional time to complete the removal of the article from a wearer.
  • the caregiver may not be able to complete the tear to remove the absorbent article in a manner similar to a taped-type absorbent article and, alternatively, would be forced to remove the absorbent article over the legs of the wearer causing the contents of the absorbent article to be unsecured and next to the skin of the wearer during removal.
  • it is important to design the frangible pathway such that the tear does not propagate along the unintended tear direction UTD, but rather along the frangible pathway.
  • the frangible pathway 700 may extend in a first pathway direction FPD and the force to tear FT may be in a second direction.
  • the first pathway direction FPD may be different than the force to tear FT in the second direction.
  • the first pathway direction FPD may be the same as the force to tear FT in the second direction.
  • the substrate also referred to herein as a material, having the frangible pathway may be weaker in one or more directions due to the characteristics of the material.
  • the frangible pathway may extend through at least a portion of a nonwoven material.
  • the nonwoven material may include a plurality of fibers oriented in a fiber orientation direction and having a bond pattern that holds together the fibers to form the nonwoven.
  • the force to tear FT the frangible pathway includes a force component that is in a direction parallel or substantially parallel to the weakest direction of the material through which the frangible pathway extends, the pathway tear strength needs to be sufficiently less than the belt tear strength to prevent tearing in an unintended tear direction.
  • FIG. 9 A- 9 C illustrate various examples of the frangible pathway 700 having a frangible pathway direction and a force to tear FT having a direction, and the force to tear FT having each of a horizontal force to tear component FT H and a vertical force to tear component FTv. Due to the force to tear FT having directional components that are substantially parallel to the weakest material direction or weakest substrate direction, the tear may be more susceptible to propagate outside of the frangible pathway.
  • the tear strength of the belt should be greater than the tear strength of the frangible pathway.
  • the difference between the tear strength of the belt and the tear strength of the frangible pathway are such that the tear remains on the frangible pathway.
  • the characteristics of the belt determine the belt tear strength.
  • the belt 106 , 108 may comprise one or more substrates, such as a first substrate 162 , and/or second substrate 164 , and may be constructed from various materials.
  • the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162 , and/or second substrate 164 that may be manufactured from materials such as plastic films; apertured plastic films; woven or nonwoven webs of natural materials (e.g., wood or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers (e.g., polyolefins, polyamides, polyester, polyethylene, or polypropylene fibers) or a combination of natural and/or synthetic fibers; or coated woven or nonwoven webs.
  • the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162 , and/or second substrate 164 comprising a nonwoven web of synthetic fibers and may include a stretchable nonwoven.
  • the type of materials used for the one or more substrates of the belt influences the belt tear strength.
  • nonwoven belts are manufactured using various techniques in which, generally, fibers are laid down onto a carrier and one or more bond patterns may be used to secure of the fibers of the substrate.
  • the direction in which the carrier is moving, the machine direction MD, into which the fibers are laid down is the direction in which the majority of the fibers of the substrate are oriented, referred to herein as a fiber orientation direction.
  • the shape and density of bonds throughout the substrate also influences the strength of the belt.
  • the belt may be stronger along certain axes given the fiber orientation direction and the characteristics of the bond pattern.
  • Example bond patterns in various configurations are described in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2017/0000663; 2014/0088535; 2016/0324698; and 2016/0101003; and U.S.
  • the substrate which may be an outer garment facing surface, an inner wearer facing surface, or an intermediate layer of the belt, may include a plurality of fibers having a denier of less than about 1.5 or less than about 1.2 or less than about 1. specifically reciting all 0.1 increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the belt and, individually, the one or more substrates forming the belt may have a basis weight.
  • the higher the basis weight of the substrate and/or the belt the greater the tear strength of the belt and/or substrate.
  • the basis weight of the one or more substrates may be optimized so that the desired tear strength is reached without sacrificing too much softness. Stated another way, the higher the basis weight of the one or more substrates, the greater the stiffness of the one or more substrates.
  • the basis weight may be selected such that it provides the necessary strength to the substrate while being soft against the wearer's skin during use.
  • the basis weight of the belt may be less than about 60 gsm or less than about 50 gsm less than about gsm or less than about 40 gsm or less than about 35 gsm or less than about 30 gsm or less than about 25 gsm or less than about 20 gsm, specifically reciting all 0.1 gsm increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the basis weight of the belt is the sum of the basis weight for each substrate layer used to form the belt, which may be one or more substrates.
  • the substrate may have a basis weight of less than about 30 gsm, or less than about 25 gsm, or less than about 20 gsm or less than about 15 gsm or less than about 10 gsm or less than about 8 gsm or from about 6 gsm to about 30 gsm or from about 8 gsm or about 20 gsm or from about 8 gsm to about 11 gsm, specifically reciting all 0.1 gsm increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the substrate may include a softness enhancer additive to increase the softness of the substrate.
  • a softness enhancer additive may be used to impart softness to the substrate.
  • the softness enhancer additive may be added to the composition in neat form, diluted, and/or as a masterbatch in, for example, polyolefin polymers such as polypropylene, polystyrene, low density polyethylene, high density polyethylene, or propylene-alpha-olefin copolymers.
  • a composition suitable to make fibers as described herein contains one or more softness enhancer additive, which can be present in an amount of between 0.01% to 10%, or between 0.05% to 5%, or between 0.3% to 1%, or between 0.01% to 1%, or between 0.2% to 0.5% by weight of the fibers, specifically reciting all 0.1% increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • Example softness enhancer additives in various configurations are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 9,993,369, which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • the softness enhancer additive may be on a single side, such as the garment facing surface or the wearer facing surface of the belt.
  • the softness enhance additive may be present in different amounts on each of the garment facing surface of the belt and the wearer facing surface of the belt.
  • At least a portion of the frangible pathway 700 may be at a pathway angle ⁇ with respect to lateral centerline of the elastic belt 126 a , 126 b through which the frangible pathway may extend.
  • the frangible pathway angle ⁇ may be less than 90 degrees or less than 85 degrees or less than 75 degrees or less than 65 degrees or less than 45 degrees or less than 35 degrees or less than 25 degrees or less than 15 degrees.
  • the frangible pathway angle ⁇ may be from 0 degrees to 85 degrees or from about 15 degrees to about 75 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 45 degrees or from about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees, specifically reciting all 0.1 degree increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the frangible pathway 700 may include a first frangible pathway 700 a and a second frangible pathway 700 b .
  • Each of the first frangible pathway 700 a and the second frangible pathway 700 b may from a pathway angle ⁇ with respect to the lateral centerline of the first elastic belt 126 a .
  • FIGS. 9 A- 9 C illustrate examples of frangible pathways 700 having a frangible pathway angle ⁇ with respect to the lateral centerline 126 a . It is to be appreciated that the frangible pathway angle may apply to the entire frangible pathway or one or more portions of the frangible pathway may have a frangible pathway angle as described herein.
  • the frangible pathway 700 may be at a pathway angle ⁇ with respect to fiber orientation direction 720 of the substrate through which the frangible pathway extends.
  • the fiber orientation direction 720 is the direction in which the majority of the fibers are oriented, which is substantially parallel to the machine direction in which the fibers are laid down during the production process.
  • the pathway angle ⁇ may be less than 90 degrees or less than 80 degrees or less than 75 degrees or less than 65 degrees or less than 45 degrees or less than 35 degrees or less than 25 degrees or less than 15 degrees, specifically reciting all 0.1 degree increments within the above recited ranges and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the frangible pathway angle ⁇ may be from 0 degrees to 85 degrees or from about 15 degrees to about 75 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 45 degrees or from about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees, specifically reciting all 0.1 degree increments within the above recited ranges and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • FIGS. 9 D- 9 E illustrate examples of frangible pathways 700 having a frangible pathway angle ⁇ with respect to the fiber orientation direction 720 .
  • the fiber orientation direction may be substantially parallel to the lateral centerline 126 a of the belt or at an angle with respect to the lateral centerline of the belt.
  • the tear strength of the belt referred to herein as the belt tear strength
  • the tear strength of the frangible pathway referred to herein as the pathway tear strength.
  • the pathway tear strength must be less than the belt tear strength.
  • the difference between the pathway tear strength, according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and the belt tear strength, according to the Material Tear Strength test method may be greater than about 3 N or greater than about 5 N or greater than about 8 N or greater than about 10 N or greater than about 15 N or greater than about 20 N or from about 4 N to about 30 N or from about 4 N to about N or from about 5 N to about 20 N or from about 10 N to about 20 N or from about 15 N to about 20 N, specifically reciting all 0.1 N increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the larger the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength the more unlikely the tear will propagate in an unintended tear direction.
  • each of the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength may be such that the belt maintains proper position of the absorbent article during use and the pathway tear strength maintains closure of the belt during use and ease of opening during removal of the diaper pant.
  • the pathway tear strength may be greater than about 2 N or greater than about 3 N or greater than about 5 N or greater than about 10 N or greater than about 15 N or from about 2 N to about 20 N or from about 2 N to about 16 N or from about 5 N to about 10 N or from about 6 N to about 8 N, according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method disclosed herein, and specifically reciting all 0.1 N increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the belt tear strength may be greater than about 4 N or greater than about 6 N or greater than about 8 N or greater than about 12 N or greater than about 20 N or greater than about 25 N or greater than about 30 N or from about 4 N to about 40 N or from about 7 N to about N or from about 8 N to about 20 N or from about 8 N to about 15 N or from about 8 N to about N, according to the Material Tear Strength test method disclosed herein, and specifically reciting all 0.1 N increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the frangible pathway may include a first tear zone and a second tear zone, as previously discussed.
  • the belt may include one or more substrate layers and one or more elastics.
  • the elastics are severed in the region of the frangible pathway as to not interfere with tearing along the frangible pathway.
  • the belt may include a belt tear strength and a belt standard deviation according to the Material Tear Strength test method.
  • the frangible pathway may include a pathway tear strength and a pathway standard deviation, according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method.
  • a standard deviation factor F StDev of at least about 2 may be used to sufficiently separate the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength.
  • the standard deviation factor F StDev may be at least 4 or at least 6 or from about 2 to about 4 or from about 2 to about 6, specifically reciting all 0.1 increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • FIG. 11 illustrates, graphically, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength as related to standard deviation of the belt and pathway.
  • the belt may also be softness so that the diaper pant is comfortable for wearing.
  • the belt may comprise one or more surfaces which comprise an Average TS7 value of about 10 dB V 2 rms or less, or about 7 dB V 2 rms or less, or about 5 dB V 2 rms or less, or from about 1 dB V 2 rms to about 10 dB V 2 rms, or from about 2 dB V 2 rms to about 8 dB V 2 rms according to the Softness Test Method herein, specifically reciting all 0.1 dB V 2 rms increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the belt may comprise one or more surfaces with an Average TS750 value of about dB V 2 rms or less, or about 50 dB V 2 rms or less, or about 25 dB V 2 rms or less, or about 15 dB V 2 rms or less, or from about 10 dB V 2 rms to about 100 dB V 2 rms, or from about 10 dB V 2 rms to about 80 dB V 2 rms, or from about 15 dB V 2 rms to about 75 dB V 2 rms according to the Softness Test Method herein, specifically reciting all 0.1 dB V 2 rms increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • a substrate of the belt may comprise one or more surfaces with an Average TS750 value of about 11 dB V 2 rms or less, or about 10 dB V 2 rms or less, or about 5 dB V 2 rms or less, or from about 1 dB V 2 rms to about 11 dB V 2 rms, or from about 1.5 dB V 2 rms to about 6 dB V 2 rms, or from about 2 dB V 2 rms to about 4 dB V 2 rms according to the Softness Test Method herein, reciting for each range every 0.1 dB V 2 rms increment therein. Lower TS7 and TS750 values indicate greater softness, which is highly desirable in absorbent articles. Consumers might find absorbent articles with high TS7 and TS750 values uncomfortable and/or scratchy or otherwise undesirable.
  • FIGS. 12 - 17 illustrate the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for each of Examples 1-6.
  • Each of Examples 1-6 included a belt having a first substrate and a second substrate.
  • Each of the first substrate and the second substrate has a basis weight and is made from a certain material, as indicated in each of Table 1 and Table 2.
  • the pathway tear strength, the belt tear strength, and the standard deviation of each of the belt and the frangible pathway was generated using the Pathway Tear Strength test method and the Material Tear Strength test method as disclosed herein.
  • Examples 1-3 include belts comprising a first and second substrate each having a basis weight and the combined basis weight for each of Examples 1-3 is different.
  • the frangible pathway for each of Examples 1-3 is the same, having a pathway angle at 35 degrees.
  • the basis weight is different and the pathway angle is the same.
  • Examples 1 and 2 include a belt having a pathway tear strength and a belt tear strength that are sufficiently different that when tearing along the frangible pathway, the tear will be more inclined to propagate along the frangible pathway than in an unintended tear direction.
  • Example 3 includes a belt having a pathway tear strength and a belt tear strength that are not sufficiently different, as illustrated in FIG. 14 , that when tearing along the frangible pathway, the tear will be more inclined to propagate in an unintended tear direction than along the frangible pathway.
  • Examples 4-6 include belts comprising a first and second substrate each having a basis weight and the combined basis weight for each of Examples 4-6 is the same.
  • the frangible pathway for each of Examples 4-6 is different, the pathway angle varies from 30 degrees to 40 degrees.
  • the basis weight is the same and the pathway angle is different.
  • Examples 4-6 include a belt having a pathway tear strength and a belt tear strength that are sufficiently different that when tearing along the frangible pathway at varying pathway angles, the tear will be more inclined to propagate along the frangible pathway than in an unintended tear direction.
  • the pathway angle approaches the lateral centerline of the belt, the pathway tear strength decreases and the delta tear strength increases.
  • the standard deviation is another way to analyze a belt comprising a frangible pathway to determine whether the tear will propagate along the frangible pathway and be deterred from propagating in an unintended tear direction.
  • the standard deviation was determine using the Pathway Tear Strength and the Material Test Strength test methods disclosed herein.
  • the basis weight is varied while having a constant pathway angle, and for Examples 4-6 the basis weight is constant, and the pathway angle is varied.
  • a standard deviation factor may be used to determine the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength and ensure there is sufficient difference between these tear strengths.
  • the Delta Tear Strength & F StDev data is determined by the following equation: (belt tear strength ⁇ (F StDev ⁇ belt standard deviation)) ⁇ (pathway tear strength+(F StDev ⁇ pathway standard deviation)), which is directed to the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength using the standard deviation.
  • the belt tear strength must be greater than the pathway tear strength to prevent tearing in an unintended tear direction along the frangible pathway.
  • the belt of Example 1 has a sufficient difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 1, 2 and 3.
  • Example 1 the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 4 is insufficient and the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction.
  • the belt tear strength is greater than the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 1-4, and thus, the tear will be inclined to propagate along the frangible pathway of belt and not in an unintended tear direction.
  • the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 1-4 are insufficient, and thus, the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction.
  • the belt of Example 4 the belt tear strength is greater than the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 1-4.
  • the belt of Example 5 has a sufficient difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 1-3. However, for Example 5, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 4 is insufficient, and the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction.
  • the belt of Example 6 has a sufficient difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 1 and 2. However, for Example 6, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at F StDev of 3 and 4 is insufficient, and the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction. Generally, the greater the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength, the more inclined the tear will remain on the frangible pathway when tearing and the less likely the tear will propagate in an unintended tear direction.
  • grip regions 801 and accessibility openings 802 may be located in various positions in the first end region 106 a , the second end region 106 b , and/or the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 .
  • Grip regions 801 and accessibility openings 802 may be positioned between the first longitudinal side edge 111 a , the second longitudinal side edge 111 b , the outer edge 107 a , and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the first accessibility opening 802 a and/or the second accessibility 802 b may be entirely laterally positioned between the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 .
  • the first accessibility opening 802 a may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal side edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106 and/or first side seam 178 .
  • the second accessibility opening 802 b may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal side edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106 and/or second side seam 180 .
  • the first accessibility opening 802 a and/or the second accessibility opening 802 b may be positioned longitudinally between the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102 and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 and/or may be positioned longitudinally between the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102 and the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the first accessibility opening 802 a may extend across the first longitudinal edge 128 and/or the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102
  • the second accessibility opening 802 b may extend across the second longitudinal edge 130 and/or the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102 .
  • accessibility openings 802 may be located in various positions relative to fastener components 707 .
  • the accessibility opening 802 may be positioned longitudinally between the fastener component 707 and the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 .
  • the accessibility opening 802 may be positioned longitudinally between the fastener component 707 and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the accessibility opening 802 may be positioned laterally inboard of the fastener component 707 .
  • more than one accessibility opening 802 may be located adjacent a fastener component 707 .
  • the accessibility opening 802 may also be configured to extend partially or entirely through a fastener component 707 and may divide a fastener component 707 into two or more parts.
  • the accessibility opening 802 may comprise slits and/or openings in the first belt 106 and may be curved and/or straight. It is to be appreciated that the accessibility openings 802 may also be oriented in various ways. For example, the accessibility opening 802 may be generally oriented perpendicularly relative to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 . In some configurations, the accessibility opening 802 may be generally oriented parallel relative to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 .
  • the accessibility opening 802 may comprise a slit that extends along a line in a lateral direction to define an angle from about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees with respect to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 , specifically reciting all 1 degree increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the accessibility opening 802 may define a length dimension in the range of about mm to about 50 mm, specifically reciting all 0.1 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • the diaper pant 100 P may include one or more fastener components 707 adapted to refastenably connect with at least one other component of the diaper pant 100 P in a disposal configuration.
  • the fastener components 707 may be configured in various shapes and sizes and may be located in various positions relative to other components of the diaper pant 100 P.
  • fastener components 707 may be positioned on and connected with the wearer facing surface 115 b of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 in a region where the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 overlaps the chassis 102 .
  • the fastener component 707 may be sandwiched between the second substrate 164 of the first elastic belt 106 or the second elastic belt 108 and the backsheet 136 of the chassis 102 .
  • the fastener component 707 comprises hooks 715 protruding from a base 717 , and the hooks 715 extend from the first belt 106 toward the backsheet 136 .
  • the fastener component 707 may be configured as a separate discrete element that may be connected with the wearer facing surface 115 b of the first belt 106 in various ways. For example, as shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the base 717 may be configured in various ways.
  • the base 717 may comprise a thermoplastic film.
  • the base 717 may comprise a laminate with various layers bonded together, such as disclosed for example in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2021/0045931 A1.
  • the base 717 may comprise a thermoplastic film layer bonded with a nonwoven layer.
  • the fastener component 707 may be integrally formed from materials of the first belt 106 , such as shown for example in FIG. 19 , or may be integrally formed from materials and attached with the first belt.
  • Components of the absorbent articles described herein may at least partially be comprised of bio-based content as described in U.S. Pat. Appl. No. 2007/0219521A1.
  • the superabsorbent polymer component may be bio-based via their derivation from bio-based acrylic acid. Bio-based acrylic acid and methods of production are further described in U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2007/0219521 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,703,450; 9,630,901 and 9,822,197.
  • Other components for example nonwoven and film components, may comprise bio-based polyolefin materials. Bio-based polyolefins are further discussed in U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. Nos.
  • Example bio-based polyolefins for use in the present disclosure comprise polymers available under the designations SHA7260 TM, SHE150 TM, or SGM9450FTM (all available from Braskem S.A.).
  • An absorbent article component may comprise a bio-based content value from about 10% to about 100%, from about 25% to about 100%, from about 40% to about 100%, from about 50% to about 100%, from about 75% to about 100%, or from about 90% to about 100%, for example, using ASTM D6866-10, method B.
  • Components of the absorbent articles described herein may be recycled for other uses, whether they are formed, at least in part, from recyclable materials.
  • absorbent article materials that may be recycled are nonwovens, films, fluff pulp, and superabsorbent polymers.
  • the recycling process may use an autoclave for sterilizing the absorbent articles, after which the absorbent articles may be shredded and separated into different byproduct streams.
  • Example byproduct streams may comprise plastic, superabsorbent polymer, and cellulose fiber, such as pulp. These byproduct streams may be used in the production of fertilizers, plastic articles of manufacture, paper products, viscose, construction materials, absorbent pads for pets or on hospital beds, and/or for other uses. Further details regarding absorbent articles that aid in recycling, designs of recycle friendly diapers, and designs of recycle friendly and bio-based component diapers, are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. 2019/0192723, published on Jun. 27, 2019.
  • a belt material sample containing a frangible pathway is torn along the frangible pathway using a constant rate of extension tensile tester, and the load during tearing is measured. Material is preconditioned to 23 ⁇ 1° C. and 50 ⁇ 2% RH for at least two hours prior to testing, and all sample preparation and testing is carried out under these same conditions.
  • Belts side seams are separated by hand.
  • Belts containing frangible path way(s) are not separated from finished articles. Any cuts, tabs, or other features present along the frangible pathway to facilitate tearing of the frangible pathway are noted, as such features will be used in the tensile pull. If no such features are present along the frangible path, the frangible path is separated in the mm span at the center of the belt width, and if necessary, a tab lead for pulling (such as hooked material or tape with tenacious adhesive) is affixed so as to enable a tensile pull without the separation of the tab.
  • the term “laminate width” corresponds to the dimension of the belt that would be in the longitudinal direction in its orientation on a finished article.
  • At least three specimen replicates are prepared. It is acceptable for pairs of specimens to be performed on the same belt portion, particularly if two frangible paths exist together on either the front or back belt of a finished article.
  • a constant rate of extension tensile tester is configured as follows. A 50 or 100 N load cell is used. A pneumatic lower grip at least 6 inches wide is used. A pneumatic upper grip at least 1 inch wide is used. Grip faces are chosen so as to minimize slippage and may be faced with rubber or sandpaper.
  • the tensile tester crosshead speed is 8.5 mm/s. The default initial crosshead separation is 55 mm, though this may be adjusted as necessary to securely grip the specimen and facilitate the intended pull.
  • the tensile tester is programmed for extension travel of 250 mm. Data are recorded at a frequency of at least 50 Hz.
  • Each specimen is mounted in the tensile tester with the full belt laminate width in the lower grip of the tensile tester.
  • the belt is mounted such that the tear propagates in the direction of the frangible path.
  • the one or more tabs, grip features, or affixed lead to facilitate tearing are clamped in the upper grip so as to minimize slack but not to impart tension.
  • the load cell is then zeroed.
  • the tensile test is then run to an extension of 250 mm at a rate of 8.5 mm/s and data are captured at a frequency of at least 50 Hz, as specified above.
  • a belt material sample lacking a frangible pathway is torn using a constant rate of extension tensile tester.
  • the method intent is to measure an average tear strength of the belt that results when a belt lacking a frangible path is torn in the same manner as is intended for a finished belt with a frangible pathway and often including a pull tab or some other element to initiate a tear.
  • Material is preconditioned to 23 ⁇ 1° C. and 50 ⁇ 2% RH for at least two hours prior to testing, and all sample preparation and testing is carried out under these same conditions.
  • front and rear belt contain a frangible pathway. In this instance, it is most preferred to use the belt (front or rear) lacking a frangible path for this method.
  • belt portions are taken from belt laminate roll stock. If roll stock is not available, it is acceptable as a final alternative to perform this method on a region of the belt most distal from the frangible pathway(s).
  • Belts side seams are separated by hand.
  • Belts both containing and lacking frangible pathways are excised from like finished articles.
  • the belt containing a frangible pathway is stretched flat next to the belt lacking a frangible pathway with the same longitudinal and lateral orientation. Any cuts, tabs, or other features present along the frangible pathway to facilitate tearing of the frangible pathway are replicated in the belt lacking a frangible pathway, which is the specimen to be tested. If no such features are present along the frangible path, a simple tab (to enable tensile tester grip) 25 mm by 25 mm is cut centered in the laminate width.
  • laminate width corresponds to the dimension of the belt that would be in the longitudinal direction in its orientation on a finished article.
  • At least three specimen replicates are prepared. It is acceptable for pairs of specimens to be performed on the same belt portion, particularly if two frangible pathways exist together on either the front or back belt of a finished article.
  • a constant rate of extension tensile tester is configured as follows. A 50 or 100 N load cell is used. A pneumatic lower grip at least 6 inches wide is used. A pneumatic upper grip at least 1 inch wide is used. Grip faces are chosen so as to minimize slippage and may be faced with rubber or sandpaper.
  • the tensile tester crosshead speed is 8.5 mm/s. The default initial crosshead separation is 15 mm, though this may be adjusted as necessary to securely grip the specimen and facilitate the intended pull.
  • the tensile tester is programmed for extension travel of 250 mm. Data are recorded at a frequency of at least 50 Hz.
  • Each specimen is mounted in the tensile tester with the full laminate width in the lower grip of the tensile tester.
  • the laminate is mounted such that the tear propagates generally from the center of the belt toward one of the side seams of the belt.
  • the one or more tabs or grip features to facilitate tearing are clamped in the upper grip so as to minimize slack but not to impart tension.
  • the load cell is then zeroed.
  • the tensile test is then run to an extension of 250 mm at a rate of 8.5 mm/s and data are captured at a frequency of at least 50 Hz, as specified above.
  • TS7 and TS750 values are measured using an EMTEC Tissue Softness Analyzer (“Emtec TSA”) (Emtec Electronic GmbH, Leipzig, Germany) interfaced with a computer running Emtec TSA software (version 3.19 or equivalent).
  • Emtec the TS7 value correlates with the real material softness
  • the TS750 value correlates with the felt smoothness/roughness of the material.
  • the Emtec TSA comprises a rotor with vertical blades which rotate on the test sample at a defined and calibrated rotational speed (set by manufacturer) and contact force of 100 mN. Contact between the vertical blades and the test piece creates vibrations, which create sound that is recorded by a microphone within the instrument. The recorded sound file is then analyzed by the Emtec TSA software.
  • Substrates and laminates are generally excised as belts from finished articles. Side seams are first separated by hand, and belt portions are then separated from the chassis, optionally using a separation aid such as cryogenic freeze spray. Constituent substrates may be further excised from laminates via an additional step in which the substrate layers of a laminate and any elastics or other elements present are separated, again optionally using a separation aid such as cryogenic freeze spray. In some cases, substrates and laminates, either with or without frangible pathways, available as roll stock may be tested directly. Test samples are prepared by cutting square or circular samples from a finished product. Test samples are cut to a length and width (or diameter if circular) of about 90 mm, and no greater than about 120 mm, in dimension.
  • the finished product has a discrete section of elastic region (i.e. elastic region is shorter in one or more dimensions than nonwoven facing-layers)
  • a set of rectilinear specimens 76 mm ⁇ 3 mm long in the primary stretch direction, and 100 mm ⁇ 3 mm wide in the perpendicular direction is cut from the product part, with the elastic region centered in the rectilinear specimen where applicable.
  • Test samples are selected to avoid creases or folds within the testing region, unless inherent to the sample such as corrugations.
  • the test sample into the instrument and ensure the sample is clamped into the TSA instrument properly with its first surface facing upwards. For samples with a discrete section of elastic region, ensure that the elastic region is centered below the Emtec vertical blades, and then perform the test according to the manufacturer's instructions.
  • the software displays values for TS7 and TS750. Record each of these values to the nearest 0.01 dB V 2 rms.
  • test piece is then removed from the instrument and discarded. This testing is performed individually on the first surface of four of the replicate samples, and on the second surface of the other four replicate samples.
  • test result values for TS7 and TS750 from the first surface are averaged (using a simple numerical average); the same is done for the four test result values for TS7 and TS750 from the second surface. Report the individual average values and standard deviation of TS7 and TS750 for both the first and second surfaces on a particular test sample to the nearest 0.01 dB V 2 rms.
  • Average Decitex Average Decitex
  • the Average Decitex Method is used to calculate the Average-Dtex on a length-weighted basis for elastic fibers present in an entire article, or in a specimen of interest extracted from an article.
  • the decitex value is the mass in grams of a fiber present in 10,000 meters of that material in the relaxed state.
  • the decitex value of elastic fibers or elastic laminates containing elastic fibers is often reported by manufacturers as part of a specification for an elastic fiber or an elastic laminate including elastic fibers.
  • the Average-Dtex is to be calculated from these specifications if available.
  • the decitex value of an individual elastic fiber is measured by determining the cross-sectional area of a fiber in a relaxed state via a suitable microscopy technique such as scanning electron microscopy (SEM), determining the composition of the fiber via Fourier Transform Infrared (FT-IR) spectroscopy, and then using a literature value for density of the composition to calculate the mass in grams of the fiber present in 10,000 meters of the fiber.
  • SEM scanning electron microscopy
  • FT-IR Fourier Transform Infrared
  • the lengths of elastic fibers present in an article or specimen extracted from an article is calculated from overall dimensions of and the elastic fiber pre-strain ratio associated with components of the article with these or the specimen, respectively, if known. Alternatively, dimensions and/or elastic fiber pre-strain ratios are not known, an absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article is disassembled and all elastic fibers are removed. This disassembly can be done, for example, with gentle heating to soften adhesives, with a cryogenic spray (e.g., Quick-Freeze, Miller-Stephenson Company, Danbury, CT), or with an appropriate solvent that will remove adhesive but not swell, alter, or destroy elastic fibers. The length of each elastic fiber in its relaxed state is measured and recorded in millimeters (mm) to the nearest mm.
  • mm millimeters
  • the Average-Dtex for that absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article is defined as:
  • n is the total number of elastic fibers present in an absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article.
  • the Average-Dtex is reported to the nearest integer value of decitex (grams per 10 000 m). If the decitex value of any individual fiber is not known from specifications, it is experimentally determined as described below, and the resulting fiber decitex value(s) are used in the above equation to determine Average-Dtex.
  • each elastic fiber For each of the elastic fibers removed from an absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article according to the procedure described above, the length of each elastic fiber L k in its relaxed state is measured and recorded in millimeters (mm) to the nearest mm. Each elastic fiber is analyzed via FT-IR spectroscopy to determine its composition, and its density ⁇ k is determined from available literature values. Finally, each fiber is analyzed via SEM. The fiber is cut in three approximately equal locations perpendicularly along its length with a sharp blade to create a clean cross-section for SEM analysis.
  • Fiber cross sections are mounted on an SEM sample holder in a relaxed state, sputter coated with gold, introduced into an SEM for analysis, and imaged at a resolution sufficient to clearly elucidate fiber cross sections.
  • Fiber cross sections are oriented as perpendicular as possible to the detector to minimize any oblique distortion in the measured cross sections.
  • Fiber cross sections may vary in shape, and some fibers may consist of a plurality of individual filaments.
  • each of the three fiber cross sections is determined (for example, using diameters for round fibers, major and minor axes for elliptical fibers, and image analysis for more complicated shapes), and the average of the three areas a k for the elastic fiber, in units of micrometers squared ( ⁇ m 2 ), is recorded to the nearest 0.1 ⁇ m 2 .
  • the decitex d k of the kth elastic fiber measured is calculated by:
  • Average-Strand-Spacing d /( n ⁇ 1) where n> 1
  • the Average-Pre-Strain of a specimen are measured on a constant rate of extension tensile tester (a suitable instrument is the MTS Insight using Testworks 4.0 Software, as available from MTS Systems Corp., Eden Prairie, MN) using a load cell for which the forces measured are within 1% to 90% of the limit of the cell.
  • Articles are conditioned at 23° C. ⁇ 2 C.° and 50% ⁇ 2% relative humidity for 2 hours prior to analysis and then tested under the same environmental conditions.
  • the Average-Pre-Strain is calculated from the bend in the curve corresponding to the extension at which the nonwovens in the elastic are engaged. Plot two lines, corresponding to the region of the curve before the bend (primarily the elastics), and the region after the bend (primarily the nonwovens). Read the extension at which these two lines intersect and calculate the % Pre-Strain from the extension and the corrected gage length. Record as % Pre-strain 0.1%. Calculate the arithmetic mean of three replicate samples for each elastomeric laminate and Average-Pre-Strain to the nearest 0.1%.
  • An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a frangible pathway
  • A6 The absorbent article according to any one of the preceding paragraphs, comprising a fastener component positioned between the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt and the backsheet.
  • An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt comprising laterally opposing end portions connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, the frangible pathway comprising a first first
  • An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a fast
  • An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a frangible
  • An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, wherein

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Absorbent Articles And Supports Therefor (AREA)

Abstract

The present disclosure relates to absorbent articles including a first belt and a second belt, the first belt and/or the second belt comprising one or more frangible pathways. The frangible pathway may comprise a first tear zone and a second tear zone extending between an inner edge and an outer edge of the first belt. The diaper pant may be configured such the tear strength of the belt is greater than the tear strength of the frangible pathway so that a first tear line propagating along the first tear zone and a second tear line propagating along the second tear zone are inclined to tear along the frangible pathway rather than in an unintended tear direction.

Description

    CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION
  • This application claims the benefit, under 35 USC 119(e), of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/357,043, filed on Jun. 30, 2022; U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,400, filed on Dec. 14, 2022; U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,401, filed on Dec. 14, 2022; U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,402, filed on Dec. 14, 2022; U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,403, filed on Dec. 14, 2022; U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,404, filed on Dec. 14, 2022; U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,406, filed on Dec. 14, 2022; U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,410, filed on Dec. 14, 2022; and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 63/432,413, filed on Dec. 14, 2022, each of which are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
  • FIELD
  • The present disclosure relates to absorbent articles, and more particularly, to absorbent articles having front and/or back waist regions including one or more frangible pathways.
  • BACKGROUND
  • Some absorbent articles have components that include elastomeric laminates. Such elastomeric laminates may include an elastic material bonded to one or more nonwovens. The elastic material may include an elastic film and/or elastic strands. In some laminates, a plurality of elastic strands are joined to a nonwoven while the plurality of strands are in a stretched condition so that when the elastic strands relax, the nonwoven gathers, and in turn, forms corrugations and rugosities. The resulting elastomeric laminate is stretchable to the extent that the corrugations allow the elastic strands to elongate.
  • Absorbent articles in the form of diaper pants may also be configured with an absorbent chassis connected with front and back elastic belts, wherein opposing end regions of the front and back belts are connected with each other at side seams. In some instances, the elasticity of the front and back belts is removed in regions where the chassis connects with the belts. Thus, in some converting configurations adapted to assemble such diaper pants, stretched elastic strands are glued between two continuous nonwoven webs to form an elastic laminate. Regions of the elastic strands may then be intermittently deactivated along the length of the elastic laminate by cutting the elastic strands in areas to be connected with the chassis, sometimes referred to as tummy elastic cutting.
  • Some caregivers of older incontinent babies or toddlers may prefer a closed, pant-style disposable absorbent article to enable application to, and removal from, a child while the child is in a standing position. One disadvantage of this product form is that the removal and disposal of feces-containing products may be unhygienic and inconvenient. For example, pulling the product down could cause feces to smear down the legs of a user. In other examples, a caregiver may tear open the bonded sides using force. In turn, the force used can lead to a rapid release of energy from the diaper, causing the caregiver to lose control of the product and allowing feces to spill out. In contrast, removal and disposal of traditional open or taped diaper forms with fasteners may be readily accomplished while the child is laying on their back. In this case, the fasteners are opened, the diaper is removed from under the child, rolled into a roughly cylindrical shape, and then the fasteners are secured around the rolled, soiled diaper, closing the leg openings for hygienic disposal.
  • In order to avoid having to remove soiled diaper pants from a wearer by sliding the soiled diaper pant down the wearer's legs or tearing bonded side seams, some diaper pants may be configured with tear lines in the front belt or back belt. Such tear lines may include perforations that allow a caregiver to more easily separate the belt along the perforation lines. Once the belt is separated, the diaper pant can be more easily removed from the wearer without having to slide the diaper pant down the wearer's legs, in a similar manner as a traditional open taped diaper form. However, due to the position of the wearer, the caregiver may not be in a position to tear along such tear lines so that the belt is severed along the tear line. Thus, the caregiver may tear the belt in an unintended manner causing the belt to tear not along the perforation line but in other locations. This can lead to more difficulty in removing the product. For example, difficulty in removing the diaper may require a caregiver to utilize both hands to start and complete the tearing operation. For example, some tear lines may require a caregiver to grasp the belt on opposing sides of the tear line and pull in opposite directions to initiate and complete the tearing process. As a result, the necessity of tearing such a belt with both hands can add difficulty to the process of removing a diaper pant from baby or child that is moving or attempting to move during the diaper removal process.
  • Consequently, it would be beneficial to create pant-style articles that provide the caregiver the ability to remove and dispose soiled products in a similar manner to traditional open diaper forms. In addition, it would be beneficial to provide diaper pants with frangible pathways configured such that the tearing operation can be initiated and completed such that the belt separates only along the frangible pathway and not in other locations of the diaper.
  • SUMMARY
  • In one form, an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to the Material Tear Strength test method, wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the pathway tear strength of the frangible pathway is less than the belt tear strength of the first belt.
  • In another form, an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt comprising laterally opposing end portions connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, the frangible pathway comprising a first tear zone and a second tear zone, wherein a portion of the first tear zone extends at a first angle of less than about 90 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt, wherein a portion of the second tear zone extends at a second angle of less than about 90 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region, wherein a portion of the frangible pathway extends within the chassis overlap region, wherein the frangible pathway is configured to tear along the first tear zone and the second tear zone resulting in a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the pathway tear strength to tear along the frangible pathway including the first tear zone and the second tear zone is from about 2N to about 16N.
  • In yet another form, an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a fastener component disposed on the first belt; and a first frangible pathway in the first belt, wherein the first frangible pathway comprises a first tear zone and a second tear zone, wherein the first tear zone comprises a first initial tear zone and a first secondary tear zone, the first initial tear zone extending from a first transition zone toward the fastener component, and the first secondary tear zone extending from the first transition zone toward the laterally extending outer edge, wherein the second tear zone comprises a second initial tear zone and a second secondary tear zone, the second initial tear zone extending from a second transition zone toward the fastener component, and the second secondary tear zone extending from the second transition zone toward the laterally extending inner edge, wherein each of the frangible pathway including the first tear zone and the second tear zone has a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, wherein the first tear zone and the second tear zone tear substantially simultaneously, and wherein the pathway tear strength is from about 2N to about 16 N.
  • In yet another form, an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to the Material Tear Strength test method, and wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength is more than about 8N.
  • In yet another form, an absorbent article comprises: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, wherein the frangible pathway comprises a first tear zone and a second tear zone, wherein the frangible pathway is configured to tear along the first tear zone and the second tear zone, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength and a belt standard deviation according to the Material Tear Strength test method, wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength and a pathway standard deviation according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the belt tear strength minus a standard deviation factor multiplied by the belt standard deviation is greater than the pathway tear strength plus the standard deviation factor multiplied by the pathway standard deviation, and wherein the standard deviation factor is at least 2.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 shows a perspective view of a diaper pant in a pre-fastened configuration.
  • FIG. 1A shows a perspective view of a diaper pant with a continuous outer cover in a pre-fastened configuration.
  • FIG. 2A shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer.
  • FIG. 2B shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces toward a wearer oriented toward the viewer.
  • FIG. 2C shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer, illustrating first and second belt size and shape features.
  • FIG. 2D shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer, illustrating first and second belt size and shape features.
  • FIG. 2E shows a plan view of a diaper pant with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer, illustrating first and second belt size and shape features.
  • FIG. 2F shows a plan view of a diaper pant with a continuous outer cover with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer.
  • FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the diaper pant of FIG. 2A taken along line 3-3 showing first and second elastic belts provided with panel layers.
  • FIG. 3A is a cross-sectional detailed view of a first belt provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3A1 is a cross-sectional detailed view of another example configuration wherein the first belt is provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3A2 is a cross-sectional detailed view of another example configuration wherein the first belt is provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional detailed view of a second belt provided with panel layers wherein one panel layer is folded over another panel layer.
  • FIG. 3C is a cross-sectional view of the diaper pant of FIG. 2F taken along line 3C-3C showing first and second elastic belts provided with panel layers and a continuous outer cover.
  • FIG. 4 is perspective view of a diaper pant including frangible pathways in a front belt and adjacent an absorbent chassis.
  • FIG. 5A is a perspective view of the diaper pant of FIG. 4 showing the front belt having been torn along one of the frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 5B is a perspective view of the diaper pant of FIG. 4 showing the front belt having been torn along two frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 6A is a perspective view of a diaper pant with frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 6B is a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6A.
  • FIG. 6C shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6B as a first frangible pathway is being torn.
  • FIG. 6D shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6C after the first frangible pathway has been completely torn.
  • FIG. 6E shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6D as a second frangible pathway is being torn.
  • FIG. 6F shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 6E after the second frangible pathway has been completely torn.
  • FIG. 7A is a perspective view of a diaper pant with another configuration of frangible pathways.
  • FIG. 7B is a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7A.
  • FIG. 7C shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7B as a first frangible pathway is being torn along first and second initial tear zones.
  • FIG. 7D shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7C after a first frangible pathway has been torn along first and second initial tear zones.
  • FIG. 7E shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7D as the first frangible pathway is being torn along first and second secondary tear zones.
  • FIG. 7F shows a front plan view of the diaper pant of FIG. 7E after the first frangible pathway has been completely torn.
  • FIG. 8A is a detailed view of a fastener component configuration of FIG. 6A.
  • FIG. 9A is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the lateral centerline.
  • FIG. 9B is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the lateral centerline.
  • FIG. 9C is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the lateral centerline.
  • FIG. 9D is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the fiber orientation direction.
  • FIG. 9E is a schematic illustration of a frangible pathway direction in relation to the force to tear direction and the pathway angle with respect to the fiber orientation direction.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic illustration of the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength.
  • FIG. 11 is a graphical illustration of the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength based on the standard deviation factor.
  • FIG. 12 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 1.
  • FIG. 13 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 2.
  • FIG. 14 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 3.
  • FIG. 15 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 4.
  • FIG. 16 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 5.
  • FIG. 17 is a graphical illustration of the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for Example 6.
  • FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the fastener component of FIG. 8A.
  • FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view of the fastener component of FIG. 8A wherein the fastener component is integrally formed from belt components.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • The following term explanations may be useful in understanding the present disclosure:
  • “Absorbent article” refers to devices, which absorb and contain body exudates and, more specifically, refers to devices, which are placed against or in proximity to the body of the wearer to absorb and contain the various exudates discharged from the body. Exemplary absorbent articles include diapers, training pants, pull-on pant-type diapers (i.e., a diaper having a pre-formed waist opening and leg openings such as illustrated in U.S. Pat. No. 6,120,487), refastenable diapers or pant-type diapers, incontinence briefs and undergarments, diaper holders and liners, feminine hygiene garments such as panty liners, absorbent inserts, menstrual pads and the like.
  • “Body-facing” and “garment-facing” refer respectively to the relative location of an element or a surface of an element or group of elements. “Body-facing” implies the element or surface is nearer to the wearer during wear than some other element or surface. “Garment-facing” implies the element or surface is more remote from the wearer during wear than some other element or surface (i.e., element or surface is proximate to the wearer's garments that may be worn over the disposable absorbent article).
  • The terms “elastic,” “elastomer” or “elastomeric” refers to materials exhibiting elastic properties, which include any material that upon application of a force to its relaxed, initial length can stretch or elongate to an elongated length more than 10% greater than its initial length and will substantially recover back to about its initial length upon release of the applied force. Elastomeric materials may include elastomeric films, scrims, nonwovens, ribbons, strands, and other sheet-like structures.
  • As used herein, the term “joined” encompasses configurations whereby an element is directly secured to another element by affixing the element directly to the other element, and configurations whereby an element is indirectly secured to another element by affixing the element to intermediate member(s) which in turn are affixed to the other element.
  • As used herein, the term “distal” is used to describe a position situated away from a center of a body or from a point of attachment, and the term “proximal” is used to describe a position situated nearer to a center of a body or a point of attachment.
  • The term “substrate” is used herein to describe a material which is primarily two-dimensional (i.e., in an XY plane) and whose thickness (in a Z direction) is relatively small (i.e., 1/10 or less) in comparison to its length (in an X direction) and width (in a Y direction). Non-limiting examples of substrates include a web, layer or layers or fibrous materials, nonwovens, films, and foils such as polymeric films or metallic foils. These materials may be used alone or may comprise two or more layers laminated together. As such, a web is a substrate.
  • The term “nonwoven” refers herein to a material made from continuous (long) filaments (fibers) and/or discontinuous (short) filaments (fibers) by processes such as spunbonding, meltblowing, carding, and the like. Nonwovens do not have a woven or knitted filament pattern.
  • The term “machine direction” (MD) is used herein to refer to the direction of material flow through a process. In addition, relative placement and movement of material can be described as flowing in the machine direction through a process from upstream in the process to downstream in the process.
  • The term “cross direction” (CD) is used herein to refer to a direction that is generally perpendicular to the machine direction.
  • “Pre-strain” refers to the strain imposed on an elastic or elastomeric material prior to combining it with another element of the elastomeric laminate or the absorbent article. Pre-strain is determined by the following equation Pre-strain=((extended length of the elastic-relaxed length of the elastic)/relaxed length of the elastic)*100.
  • “Decitex” also known as Dtex is a measurement used in the textile industry used for measuring yarns or filaments. 1 Decitex=1 gram per 10,000 meters. In other words, if 10,000 linear meters of a yarn or filament weights 500 grams that yarn or filament would have a decitex of 500.
  • The term “taped diaper” (also referred to as “open diaper”) refers to disposable absorbent articles having an initial front waist region and an initial back waist region that are not fastened, pre-fastened, or connected to each other as packaged, prior to being applied to the wearer. A taped diaper may be folded about the lateral centerline with the interior of one waist region in surface to surface contact with the interior of the opposing waist region without fastening or joining the waist regions together. Example taped diapers are disclosed in various suitable configurations U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,167,897, 5,360,420, 5,599,335, 5,643,588, 5,674,216, 5,702,551, 5,968,025, 6,107,537, 6,118,041, 6,153,209, 6,410,129, 6,426,444, 6,586,652, 6,627,787, 6,617,016, 6,825,393, and 6,861,571; and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2013/0072887 A1; 2013/0211356 A1; and 2013/0306226 A1, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • The term “pant” (also referred to as “training pant,” “pre-closed diaper,” “diaper pant,” “pant diaper,” and “pull-on diaper”) refers herein to disposable absorbent articles having a continuous perimeter waist opening and continuous perimeter leg openings designed for infant or adult wearers. A pant can be configured with a continuous or closed waist opening and at least one continuous, closed, leg opening prior to the article being applied to the wearer. A pant can be preformed or pre-fastened by various techniques including, but not limited to, joining together portions of the article using any refastenable and/or permanent closure member (e.g., seams, heat bonds, pressure welds, adhesives, cohesive bonds, mechanical fasteners, etc.). A pant can be preformed anywhere along the circumference of the article in the waist region (e.g., side fastened or seamed, front waist fastened or seamed, back waist fastened or seamed). Example diaper pants in various configurations are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,940,464; 5,092,861; 5,246,433; 5,897,545; 5,957,908; 6,120,487; 6,120,489; 7,569,039 and U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2003/0233082 A1; 2005/0107764 A1, 2012/0061016 A1, 2012/0061015 A1; 2013/0255861 A1; 2013/0255862 A1; 2013/0255863 A1; 2013/0255864 A1; and 2013/0255865 A1, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • “Closed-form” means opposing waist regions are joined, as packaged, either permanently or refastenably to form a continuous waist opening and leg openings.
  • “Open-form” means opposing waist regions are not initially joined to form a continuous waist opening and leg openings but comprise a closure means such as a fastening system to join the waist regions to form the waist and leg openings before or during application to a wearer of the article.
  • The present disclosure relates to absorbent articles including elastic laminates, and more particularly, to absorbent articles having elastic laminates in front and/or back waist regions with one or more frangible pathway. In some configurations, an absorbent article may comprise: a first belt and a second belt, each belt comprising a first end region and a second end region laterally separated from the first end region by a central region. The first end region of the first belt is connected with the first end region of the second belt and the second end region of the first belt is connected with the second end region of the second belt to form a waist opening. The absorbent article may further comprise a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet. The chassis may further comprise a first end region and a second end region longitudinally separated from the first end region by a crotch region. The first end region of the chassis may be connected with the central region of the first belt and the second end region of the chassis may be connected with the central region of the second belt. The first belt may further comprise a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge.
  • As discussed in more detail below, the first belt and/or the second belt may comprise one or more frangible pathways. For example, a frangible pathway in the first and/or second belt may extend between the inner edge of the first belt and the outer edge of the first belt. The frangible pathway may extend to a proximal terminus on the inner edge and a distal terminus on the outer edge of the first belt. In turn, the frangible pathway may comprise a single tear zone or a first tear zone extending to the distal terminus and a second tear zone extending to the proximal terminus. Such frangible pathway configurations provide a feature that allows an elastic belt of a diaper pant to be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway when removing the diaper pant from a wearer, avoiding the need to remove the diaper pant by sliding the diaper pant over a wearer's legs. The tear strength needed to tear along the frangible pathway may be significantly less than the tear strength to tear the belt so that the tear only propagates along the frangible pathway and not into other areas of the belt. In addition, the frangible pathway may be configured to allow a caregiver or wearer to initiate and/or completely tear the first belt with one hand when removing a diaper pant from a wearer.
  • FIGS. 1-2B show an example of an absorbent article 100 in the form of a diaper pant 100P that may include components constructed in accordance with the configurations disclosed herein. In particular, FIG. 1 shows a perspective views of a diaper pant 100P in a pre-fastened configuration. FIG. 2A shows a plan view of the diaper pant 100P with the portion of the diaper that faces away from a wearer oriented toward the viewer, and FIG. 2B shows a plan view of the diaper pant 100P with the portion of the diaper that faces toward a wearer oriented toward the viewer. The diaper pant 100P includes a chassis 102 and a ring-like elastic belt 104. As discussed below in more detail, a first elastic belt 106 and a second elastic belt 108 are bonded together to form the ring-like elastic belt 104.
  • With continued reference to FIGS. 1-2B, the diaper pant 100P and the chassis 102 each include a first waist region 116, a second waist region 118, and a crotch region 119 disposed intermediate the first and second waist regions. It may also be described that the chassis 102 includes a first end region 116 a, a second end region 118 a, and a crotch region 119 disposed intermediate the first and second end regions 116 a, 118 a. The first waist region 116 may be configured as a front waist region, and the second waist region 118 may be configured as back waist region. The diaper 100P may also include a laterally extending front waist edge 121 in the front waist region 116 and a longitudinally opposing and laterally extending back waist edge 122 in the back waist region 118. To provide a frame of reference for the present discussion, the diaper 100P and chassis 102 of FIGS. 2A and 2B are shown with a longitudinal axis 124 and a lateral axis 126. In some embodiments, the longitudinal axis 124 may extend through the front waist edge 121 and through the back waist edge 122. And the lateral axis 126 may extend through a first longitudinal or right side edge 128 and through a second longitudinal or left side edge 130 of the chassis 102. As previously mentioned, the longitudinal axis 124 extends perpendicularly through the front waist edge 121 and the back waist edge 122, and the lateral axis 126 extends perpendicularly to the longitudinal axis 124. When the diaper pant 100P is worn, the longitudinal direction may extend from the wearer's front waist, through the crotch, to the wearer's back waist. To provide a further frame of reference for the present discussion, the diapers 100P of FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 18B are shown wherein: the first elastic belt 106 comprises a longitudinal centerline 124 a and lateral centerline 126 a; the second elastic belt 108 comprises a longitudinal centerline 124 b and lateral centerline 126 b; and the chassis 102 comprises a longitudinal centerline 124 c and lateral centerline 126 c. The longitudinal centerlines 124 a, 124 b, 124 c are perpendicular to the lateral center lines 126 a, 126 b, 126 c.
  • As shown in FIGS. 1-2B, the diaper pant 100P may include an inner, body facing surface 132, and an outer, garment facing surface 134. The chassis 102 may include a backsheet 136 and a topsheet 138. The chassis 102 may also include an absorbent assembly 140, including an absorbent core 142, disposed between a portion of the topsheet 138 and the backsheet 136. As discussed in more detail below, the diaper 100P may also include other features, such as leg elastics and/or leg cuffs to enhance the fit around the legs of the wearer.
  • As shown in FIG. 2A, the periphery of the chassis 102 may be defined by the first longitudinal side edge 128, a second longitudinal side edge 130, a first laterally extending end edge 144 disposed in the first waist region 116, and a second laterally extending end edge 146 disposed in the second waist region 118. Both side edges 128 and 130 extend longitudinally between the first end edge 144 and the second end edge 146. As shown in FIG. 2A, the laterally extending end edges 144 and 146 may be located longitudinally inward from the laterally extending front waist edge 121 in the front waist region 116 and the laterally extending back waist edge 122 in the back waist region 118. In some configurations, the laterally extending end edges 144 and 146 may be coterminous with or located longitudinally outward from the laterally extending front waist edge 121 in the front waist region 116 and the laterally extending back waist edge 122 in the back waist region 118. When the diaper pant 100P is worn on the lower torso of a wearer, the front waist edge 121 and the back waist edge 122 may encircle a portion of the waist of the wearer. At the same time, the side edges 128 and 130 may encircle at least a portion of the legs of the wearer. And the crotch region 119 may be generally positioned between the legs of the wearer with the absorbent core 142 extending from the front waist region 116 through the crotch region 119 to the back waist region 118.
  • As previously mentioned, the diaper pant 100P may include a backsheet 136. The backsheet 136 may also define the outer, garment facing surface 134 of the chassis 102. The backsheet 136 may also comprise a woven or nonwoven material, polymeric films such as thermoplastic films of polyethylene or polypropylene, and/or a multi-layer or composite materials comprising a film and a nonwoven material. The backsheet may also comprise an elastomeric film. An example backsheet 136 may be a polyethylene film having a thickness of from about mm (0.5 mils) to about 0.051 mm (2.0 mils). Further, the backsheet 136 may permit vapors to escape from the absorbent core (i.e., the backsheet is breathable) while still preventing exudates from passing through the backsheet 136.
  • Also described above, the diaper pant 100P may include a topsheet 138. The topsheet 138 may also define all or part of the inner, wearer facing surface 132 of the chassis 102. The topsheet 138 may be liquid pervious, permitting liquids (e.g., menses, urine, and/or runny feces) to penetrate through its thickness. A topsheet 138 may be manufactured from a wide range of materials such as woven and nonwoven materials; apertured or hydroformed thermoplastic films; apertured nonwovens, porous foams; reticulated foams; reticulated thermoplastic films; and thermoplastic scrims. Woven and nonwoven materials may comprise natural fibers such as wood or cotton fibers; synthetic fibers such as polyester, polypropylene, or polyethylene fibers; or combinations thereof. If the topsheet 138 includes fibers, the fibers may be spunbond, carded, wet-laid, meltblown, hydroentangled, or otherwise processed as is known in the art. Topsheets 138 may be selected from high loft nonwoven topsheets, apertured film topsheets and apertured nonwoven topsheets. Exemplary apertured films may include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,628,097; 5,916,661; 6,545,197; and 6,107,539, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • As mentioned above, the diaper pant 100P may also include an absorbent assembly 140 that is joined to the chassis 102. As shown in FIG. 2A, the absorbent assembly 140 may have a laterally extending front edge 148 in the front waist region 116 and may have a longitudinally opposing and laterally extending back edge 150 in the back waist region 118. The absorbent assembly may have a longitudinally extending right side edge 152 and may have a laterally opposing and longitudinally extending left side edge 154, both absorbent assembly side edges 152 and 154 may extend longitudinally between the front edge 148 and the back edge 150. The absorbent assembly 140 may additionally include one or more absorbent cores 142 or absorbent core layers. The absorbent core 142 may be at least partially disposed between the topsheet 138 and the backsheet 136 and may be formed in various sizes and shapes that are compatible with the diaper. Exemplary absorbent structures for use as the absorbent core of the present disclosure are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,610,678; 4,673,402; 4,888,231; and 4,834,735, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • Some absorbent core embodiments may comprise fluid storage cores that contain reduced amounts of cellulosic airfelt material. For instance, such cores may comprise less than about 40%, 30%, 20%, 10%, 5%, or even 1% of cellulosic airfelt material. Such a core may comprise primarily absorbent gelling material in amounts of at least about 60%, 70%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, or even about 100%, where the remainder of the core comprises a microfiber glue (if applicable). Such cores, microfiber glues, and absorbent gelling materials are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,562,646; 5,669,894; and 6,790,798 as well as U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2004/0158212 A1 and 2004/0097895 A1, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • As previously mentioned, the diaper 100P may also include elasticized leg cuffs 156. It is to be appreciated that the leg cuffs 156 can be and are sometimes also referred to as leg bands, side flaps, barrier cuffs, elastic cuffs or gasketing cuffs. The elasticized leg cuffs 156 may be configured in various ways to help reduce the leakage of body exudates in the leg regions. Example leg cuffs 156 may include those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,860,003; 4,909,803; 4,695,278; 4,795,454; 4,704,115; 4,909,803; and U.S. Patent Publication No. 2009/0312730 A1, all of which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • As mentioned above, diaper pants may be manufactured with a ring-like elastic belt 104 and provided to consumers in a configuration wherein the front waist region 116 and the back waist region 118 are connected to each other as packaged, prior to being applied to the wearer. As such, diaper pants may have a continuous perimeter waist opening 110 and continuous perimeter leg openings 112 such as shown in FIG. 1 . The ring-like elastic belt may be formed by joining a first elastic belt to a second elastic belt with a permanent side seam or with an openable and reclosable fastening system disposed at or adjacent the laterally opposing sides of the belts.
  • As previously mentioned, the ring-like elastic belt 104 may be defined by a first elastic belt 106 connected with a second elastic belt 108. As shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the first elastic belt 106 extends between a first longitudinal side edge 111 a and a second longitudinal side edge 111 b and defines first and second opposing end regions 106 a, 106 b and a central region 106 c. And the second elastic 108 belt extends between a first longitudinal side edge 113 a and a second longitudinal side edge 113 b and defines first and second opposing end regions 108 a, 108 b and a central region 108 c. As measured in an extended state, the distance between the first longitudinal side edge 111 a and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b defines the pitch length, PL, of the first elastic belt 106, and the distance between the first longitudinal side edge 113 a and the second longitudinal side edge 113 b defines the pitch length, PL, of the second elastic belt 108. The central region 106 c of the first elastic belt is connected with the first waist region 116 or first end region 116 a of the chassis 102, and the central region 108 c of the second elastic belt 108 is connected with the second waist region 118 or second end region 118 a of the chassis 102. As shown in FIG. 1 , the first end region 106 a of the first elastic belt 106 is connected with the first end region 108 a of the second elastic belt 108 at first side seam 178, and the second end region 106 b of the first elastic belt 106 is connected with the second end region 108 b of the second elastic belt 108 at second side seam 180 to define the ring-like elastic belt 104 as well as the waist opening 110 and leg openings 112. It is to be appreciated that the first belt 106 and the second belt 108 may be permanently or refastenably connected with each other at the first side seam 178 and the second side seam 180. The side seams 178, 180 may comprise a permanent bond, such as a thermal, pressure, or adhesive bond, or may be a releasable bond, such as a mechanical or cohesive fastener.
  • As shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the first elastic belt 106 also defines an outer laterally extending edge 107 a and an inner laterally extending edge 107 b, and the second elastic belt 108 defines an outer laterally extending edge 109 a and an inner laterally extending edge 109 b. The outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge 107 b, and the outer edge 109 a of the second belt 108 is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge 109 b. As such, as shown in FIG. 1 , a perimeter edge 112 a of one leg opening may be defined by portions of the inner laterally extending edge 107 b of the first elastic belt 106, the inner laterally extending edge 109 b of the second elastic belt 108, and the first longitudinal or right side edge 128 of the chassis 102. And a perimeter edge 112 b of the other leg opening may be defined by portions of the inner laterally extending edge 107 b, the inner laterally extending edge 109 b, and the second longitudinal or left side edge 130 of the chassis 102. The outer laterally extending edges 107 a, 109 a may also define the front waist edge 121 and the laterally extending back waist edge 122 of the diaper pant MP.
  • It is to be appreciated that the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may define different sizes and shapes. In some configurations, the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may define curved contours. For example, the inner lateral edges 107 b, 109 b of the first and/or second elastic belts 106, 108 may include non-linear or curved portions in the first and second opposing end regions. Such curved contours may help define desired shapes to leg opening 112, such as for example, relatively rounded leg openings. In addition to having curved contours, the elastic belts 106, 108 may include elastic strands 168 that extend along non-linear or curved paths that may correspond with the curved contours of the inner lateral edges 107 b, 109 b.
  • FIG. 2C shows a configuration wherein the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 both define generally rectangular shapes. For example, as shown in FIG. 2C, the outer laterally extending edge 107 a of the first elastic belt 106 may comprise a lateral width of W1D and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b may comprise a lateral width of W1P, wherein W1D and W1P are equal or substantially equal. In addition, the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 may comprise a lateral width of W2D and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b may comprise a lateral width of W2P, wherein W2D and W2P are equal or substantially equal.
  • In some configurations, at least one of the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may comprise lateral edges having different lengths. For example, FIG. 2D shows a configuration wherein the first elastic belt 106 defines a generally rectangular shape, such as described with reference to FIG. 2C, and wherein the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b have different lengths. As shown in FIG. 2D, the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 may comprise a lateral width of W2D and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b may comprise a lateral width of W2P, wherein W2D is greater than W2P.
  • In some configurations, both the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may comprise lateral edges having different lengths. For example, FIG. 2E shows a configuration wherein the outer laterally extending edge 107 a of the first elastic belt 106 and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b have different lengths, and wherein the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b have different lengths. As shown in FIG. 2E, the outer laterally extending edge 107 a of the first elastic belt 107 may comprise a lateral width of W1D and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b may comprise a lateral width of W1P, wherein W1D is greater than W1P, and wherein the outer laterally extending edge 109 a of the second elastic belt 108 may comprise a lateral width of W2D and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b may comprise a lateral width of W2P, wherein W2D is greater than W2P.
  • With reference to FIGS. 2C-2E, the first elastic belt 106 may define a longitudinal length LT1 extending between outer laterally extending edge 107 a and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b, and the second elastic belt 108 may define a longitudinal length LT2 extending between outer laterally extending edge 109 a and the inner laterally extending edge 109 b. In some configurations, LT1 may be equal to LT2. In some configurations, LT1 may be less or greater than LT2. With continued reference to FIGS. 2C-2E, in some configurations, W1D may be equal to W1P, or W1D may be different than W1P. In some configurations, W2D may be equal to W2P, or W2D may be different than W2P. In some configurations, W1D and/or W1P may be equal to or different W2D and/or W2P.
  • With reference to FIGS. 2A, 2B, and 3 , the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may also each include a first substrate 162 and a second substrate 164. The first substrates 162 may be oriented to define at least a portion of a garment facing surface 115 a of the first elastic belt 106 and a garment facing surface 117 a the second elastic belt 108, and the second substrates 164 may be oriented to define at least a portion of a wearer facing surface 115 b of the first elastic belt 106 and a wearer facing surface 117 b of the second elastic belt 108. The first substrate 162 may extend from a proximal edge 162 b to a distal edge 162 a for a maximum length L1, and the second substrate 164 may extend from a proximal edge 164 b to a distal edge 164 a for a maximum length L2. It is to be appreciated that the distal edge 162 a and/or the proximal edge 162 b of the first substrate 162 may be straight and/or curved and/or may be parallel or unparallel to each other. It is also to be appreciated that the distal edge 164 a and/or the proximal edge 164 b of the second substrate 164 may be straight and/or curved and/or may be parallel or unparallel to each other. As such, the maximum length L1 refers to the longest distance extending longitudinally between the distal edge 162 a and the proximal edge 162 b of the first substrate 162, and the maximum length L2 refers to the longest distance extending longitudinally between the distal edge 164 a and the proximal edge 164 b of the second substrate 164. In some configurations, L1 may be equal to, less than, or greater than L2. In some configurations, L1 may be equal to or less than LT1, and L2 may be equal to or less than LT2. In some configurations, the distal edge 162 a of the first substrate 162 may define at least a portion of the front waist edge 121 and/or at least a portion of back waist edge 122, and/or the distal edge 164 a of the second substrate 164 may define at least a portion of the front waist edge 121 and/or at least a portion of back waist edge 122. As such, in some configurations, the distal edge 162 a of the first substrate 162 and/or the distal edge 164 a of the second substrate 164 may define at least a portion of the waist opening 110.
  • It is also to be appreciated that the first substrate 162 and/or the second substrate 164 may extend continuously from the first belt 106 to the second belt 108. For example, the first substrate 162 may be configured to define a continuous outer cover 162′ that extends contiguously from the first waist edge 121 to the second waist edge 122, such as shown in FIGS. 1A, 2F, and 3C. It is also to be appreciated that diaper pants 100P with continuous outer covers, such as shown in FIGS. 1A, 2F, and 3C may also be configured to include various aspects of the frangible pathways and fastener components discussed herein.
  • It is to be appreciated that the first substrate 162 and the second substrate 164 may define various lateral widths that may or may not be equal. For example, as shown in FIG. 2B, the first substrate 162 may extend laterally between a first longitudinal edge 162 e and a second longitudinal edge 162 f to define a first lateral width W1, and the second substrate 164 may extend laterally between a first longitudinal edge 164 e and a second longitudinal edge 164 f to define a second lateral width W2.
  • In some configurations, the proximal edge 162 b of the first substrate 162 and/or the proximal edge 164 b of the second substrate 164 may extend laterally across the backsheet 136. As shown in FIGS. 2A-3 , the first substrate 162 includes a garment facing surface 162 c and an opposing wearer facing surface 162 d, and the second substrate 164 includes a garment facing surface 164 c and an opposing wearer facing surface 164 d.
  • In some configurations, the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a folded portion of at least the first substrate 162 and/or the second substrate 164. For example, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 extending longitudinally between a fold line 162 h in the first substrate 162 and a lateral edge 162 i. As such, the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may be connected with the wearer facing surface 164 d of the second substrate 164. In some configurations, the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may also be connected with and/or overlap the chassis 102. In some configurations, the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may also be connected with the wearer facing surface 162 d of the first substrate 162. In some configurations, a portion of the folded portion 162 g of the first substrate 162 may be left unbonded to the chassis 102 and/or the second substrate 164, forming a pocket having an opening oriented toward the lateral centerline 162 c of the chassis 102. In another example, the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a folded portion of the second substrate 164 extending longitudinally between a fold line in the second substrate 164 and a lateral edge. As such, the folded portion of the second substrate 164 may be connected with the garment facing surface 162 c of the first substrate 162. As such, in some configurations, a fold line of the first substrate 162 and/or a fold line of the second substrate 164 may define at least a portion of the waist opening 110. It is to be appreciated that various waist configurations may be utilized. For example, as shown in FIG. 3A1, the folded portion 162 g may be sandwiched between the second substrate 164 and the backsheet 136. In another example shown in FIG. 3A2, the second substrate 164 may be sandwiched between the folded portion 162 g and the backsheet 136. Although FIGS. 3A1 and 3A2 show configurations of the first belt 106, it is to be appreciated that such configurations may be applied with the second belt 108.
  • It is to be appreciated that the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 may comprise the same materials and/or may have the same structure. In some embodiments, the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt may comprise different materials and/or may have different structures. It should also be appreciated that components of the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108, such as the first substrate 162, and/or second substrate 164 may be constructed from various materials. For example, the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162, and/or second substrate 164 that may be manufactured from materials such as plastic films; apertured plastic films; woven or nonwoven webs of natural materials (e.g., wood or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers (e.g., polyolefins, polyamides, polyester, polyethylene, or polypropylene fibers) or a combination of natural and/or synthetic fibers; or coated woven or nonwoven webs. In some configurations, the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162, and/or second substrate 164 comprising a nonwoven web of synthetic fibers and may include a stretchable nonwoven. In some configurations, the first and second elastic belts may include an inner hydrophobic, non-stretchable nonwoven material and an outer hydrophobic, non-stretchable nonwoven material. It is to be appreciated that the belts may configured in various ways, such as disclosed for example, in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2022/0142828 A1 and Chinese Patent Application No. CN2021/077843, which are both incorporated by reference herein.
  • One or more substrates of the belt may include fibers. The characteristics of these fibers may be the same or different in the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the belt. Further, the characteristics of these fibers may be present in one or more the substrate layers forming the belt. Those fibers may be spunbond, carded, wet-laid, meltblown, hydroentangled, hydrojetted, or otherwise processed as is known in the art. The nonwoven may be a composite material such as a spunbond-meltblown-spunbond (SMS) material. For example, at least one of the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the substrate may comprise a carded nonwoven material. At least one of the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the belt may comprise a substrate having a plurality of fibers that are hydroentangled or have undergone a hydrojetting process. Additionally, the substrate may include a plurality of fibers having a denier or less than about 1.5 or less than about 1.3 or less than about 1.2 or less than about 1, specifically reciting all 0.1 increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • The fibers of the substrates of the present disclosure may comprise mono-component fibers or multi-component fibers, such as bi-component fibers or tri-component fibers, for example. Multi-component fibers, as used herein, means fibers comprising more than one chemical species or material (i.e., multi-constituent fibers). The fibers may comprise petroleum sourced resins, recycled resins, and/or bio-sourced resins, such as polylactic acid from Nature Works, polyethylene and/or polypropylene from Braskem, and polybutylene terephthalate from Lanxess. The fibers may have round, triangular, tri-lobal, or otherwise shaped cross-sections, for example. Often, the different polymer components have different melting temperatures, viscosities, glass transition temperatures, crystallinities, and/or crystallization rates. The multi-component fibers, such as bi-component fibers, may comprise sheath/core, side-by-side, islands in the sea, and/or eccentric configurations or may have other configurations. As an example, in the context of bi-component fibers, fibers comprising a core/sheath configuration may be comprised of a first polymer forming the core of the fiber, and a second polymer partially or completely surrounding the first polymer and forming the sheath of the fiber. For example, the substrate may comprise a polypropylene-polyethylene side by side bicomponent fibers.
  • The fibers of the substrates of the present disclosure may comprise crimped fibers. These crimped fibers may be included in at least one of the outer garment facing surface and the inner wearer facing surface of the belt. Crimped fibers may result when the different polymer components of multi-component fibers have different melting temperatures, viscosities, glass transition temperatures, crystallinities, and/or crystallization rates, and are disposed in an eccentric sheath/core or side-by-side configuration within the fibers. As the multi-component fibers cool after formation, a first polymer component may solidify and/or shrink at a faster rate than a second polymer component while the second polymer component may have sufficient rigidity to resist compression along a longitudinal fiber axis. The continuous fibers may deform and curl up when strain on the fiber is relieved, thereby causing what is known as “crimp” in the fibers. Crimp of the fibers aids in the softness and loft of a nonwoven web, which is consumer desirable. Additional details for fibers suitable for inclusion in the substrates discussed herein is disclosed in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2020/0337910, which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • Elastic material 167 may be positioned between the wearer facing surface 162 d of the first substrate 162 and the garment facing surface 164 c of the second substrate 164. It is to be appreciated that the elastic material 167 may include one or more elastic elements such as strands, ribbons, elastic films, or panels extending along the lengths of the elastic belts. As shown in FIGS. 2A and 3 , the elastic material 167 may include a plurality of elastic strands 168. In some configurations, the elastic material 167 may be an elastic film used to form a zero-strain elastic laminate comprising an elastic film bonded to one or more nonwoven layers and subsequently subjected to mechanical deformation or activation sufficient to weaken the nonwoven layer(s) and enable the laminate to stretch and recover elastically.
  • It is also to be appreciated that the first substrate 162, second substrate 164, and/or elastic material 167 of the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may be bonded together and/or with other components, such as the chassis 102, with adhesive and/or mechanical bonds. It is to be appreciated that adhesive and mechanical bonding methods may be utilized alone or in combination with each other.
  • In some configurations, adhesive may be applied to at least one of the first substrate 162, second substrate 164, and/or elastic material 167 when being combined to form the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108. In some configurations, mechanical bonding devices may apply mechanical bonds to the to at least one of the first substrate 162, second substrate 164, and/or elastic material 167 when being combined to form the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108. Such mechanical bonds may be applied with heat, pressure, and/or ultrasonic devices. In some configurations, mechanical bonding devices may apply bonds that bond the first substrate 162, second substrate 164, and/or elastic material 167 together and/or may act to trap or immobilize discrete lengths of the contracted elastic strands in the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108.
  • It is also to be appreciated that the first substrate 162, second substrate 164, and/or elastic material 167 may be bonded together with various methods and apparatuses to create various elastomeric laminates, such as described in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2018/0168878 A1; 2018/0168877 A1; 2018/0168880 A1; 2018/0170027 A1; 2018/0169964 A1; 2018/0168879 A1; 2018/0170026 A1; 2018/0168889 A1; 2018/0168874 A1; 2018/0168875 A1; 2018/0168890 A1; 2018/0168887 A1; 2018/0168892 A1; 2018/0168876 A1; 2018/0168891 A1; 2019/0070042 A1; 2019/0070041 A1; 2021/0282797 A1; and 2021/0275362 A1, and combinations thereof, all of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • It is to be appreciated that components of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may be assembled in various ways and various combinations to create various desirable features that may differ along the lateral width and/or longitudinal length of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108. Such features may include, for example, Dtex values, bond patterns, aperture arrangements, elastic positioning, Average Dtex values, Average Pre-Strain values, rugosity frequencies, rugosity wavelengths, height values, and/or contact area. It is to be appreciated that differing features may be imparted to various components, such as for example, the first substrate 162, second substrate 164, and elastic material 167 before and/or during stages of assembly of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108.
  • It is to be appreciated that the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include various configurations of belt elastic materials 167 arranged in relation to each other and to the first substrate 162, and the second substrate 164. As discussed above, the elastic material 167 may include configurations of one or more elastic elements such as strands, ribbons, films, or panels positioned in various arrangements. In some configurations, the elastic material 167 may comprise various elastics, elastic features and arrangements, and processes for assembly, such as described in 2018/0168889 A1; 2018/0168874 A1; 2018/0168875 A1; 2018/0168890 A1; 2018/0168887 A1; 2018/0168892 A1; 2018/0168876 A1; 2018/0168891 A1; 2019/0298586 A1; 2019/0070042 A1; 2018/0168878 A1; 2018/0168877 A1; 2018/0168880 A1; 2018/0170027 A1; 2018/0169964 A1; 2018/0168879 A1; 2018/0170026 A1; 2019/0070041 A1; 2021/0282797A1; and 2021/0275362 A1, which are all incorporated by reference. It is also to be appreciated the elastic materials 167 herein may be configured with identical or different colors in various different locations on the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108.
  • In some configurations, the elastic material 167 may be configured as elastic strands 168 disposed at a constant interval in the longitudinal direction. In other embodiments, the elastic strands 168 may be disposed at different intervals in the longitudinal direction. In some configurations, the Dtex values of the elastic strands 168 may be constant or varied along the longitudinal direction. In some configurations, the elastic material 167 in a stretched condition may be interposed and joined between uncontracted substrate layers. When the elastic material 167 is relaxed, the elastic material 167 returns to an unstretched condition and contracts the substrate layers. The elastic material 167 may provide a desired variation of contraction force in the area of the ring-like elastic belt. It is to be appreciated that the chassis 102 and elastic belts 106, 108 may be configured in different ways other than as depicted in attached Figures. It is also to be appreciated that the elastic material 167 may be joined to the substrates continuously or intermittently along the interface between the elastic material 167 and the substrates. In some configurations, the elastic strands 168 may be in the form of extruded elastic strands, which may also be bonded with the first substrate 162 and/or second substrate 164 in a pre-corrugated configuration, such as disclosed for example in U.S. Pat. No. 5,681,302, which is incorporated by reference herein.
  • As discussed above for example with reference to FIGS. 2A and 3 , the elastic material 167 discussed herein may be in the form of elastic strands 168. In some configurations, the elastic strands 168 may be parallel with each other and/or with the lateral axis 126. It is to be appreciated that the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may be configured to include various quantities of elastic strands 168. In some configurations, elastic strands 168 may be grouped in pairs. In some configurations, the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 may comprise from about 10 to about 1500 elastic strands 168. It is also to be appreciated that elastic strands 168 herein may comprise various Dtex values, strand spacing values, and pre-strain values and such elastic strands 168 may utilized with other elastic strands to create first and second elastic belts 106, 108 comprising elastic strands 168 in various combinations of Dtex values, strand spacing values, and pre-strain values. For example, in some configurations, the Average-Dtex of one or more elastic strands 168 may be greater than 500. In some configurations, the Average-Dtex of one or more elastic strands 168 may be from about 10 to about 1500, specifically reciting all 1 Dtex increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. In some configurations, a plurality of elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing of less than or equal to 4 mm. In some configurations, a plurality of elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm, specifically reciting all 0.01 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. In some configurations, a plurality of elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing of greater than 4 mm. In some configurations, the Average-Pre-Strain of each of a plurality of elastic strands may be from about 50% to about 400%, specifically reciting all 1% increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. In some configurations, the elastic strands 168 comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm and an Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500. In some configurations, the elastic strands 168 may comprise an Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%.
  • In some configurations, a first plurality of elastic strands may comprise a first Average-Pre-Strain from about 75% to about 300%, and a second plurality of elastic strands may comprise a second Average-Pre-Strain that is greater than first Average-Pre-Strain. In some configurations, a first plurality of elastic strands comprises an Average-Strand-Spacing from about 0.25 mm to about 4 mm and an Average-Dtex from about 10 to about 500; and a second plurality of elastic strands may comprise an Average-Strand-Spacing greater than about 4 mm and an Average-Dtex greater than about 450.
  • In some configurations, such as shown in FIG. 2A, the elastic strands 168 may be referred to herein as outer waist elastics 170 and inner waist elastics 172. Elastic strands 168, such as the outer waist elastics 170, may continuously extend laterally between the first and second opposing end regions 106 a, 106 b of the first elastic belt 106 and between the first and second opposing end regions 108 a, 108 b of the second elastic belt 108. Some elastic strands 168, such as the inner waist elastics 172, may be configured with discontinuities in areas, such as for example, where the first and second elastic belts 106, 108 overlap portions of the chassis 102, such as the absorbent assembly 140.
  • As shown in FIG. 2A, the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may be configured with low-stretch zones 701 and high-stretch zones 703. The first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may include a first high-stretch zone 703 a and a second high-stretch zone 703 b separated laterally by a low-stretch zone 701. Portions of the chassis 102, such as the backsheet 136 and absorbent assembly 140, may be connected with the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 in the low-stretch zones 701 in the first waist region 116 and/or the second waist region 118. The high-stretch zones 703 are elasticated by the elastic material 167, such as the elastic strands 168, 172; and the low-stretch zones 701 may comprise cut lines separating the elastic material 167, such as the elastic strands 168, 172. In some configurations, the elastic material 167 may be cut in an unbonded region where the elastic material is not bonded with first substrate 162 and the second substrate 164. Thus, the elastic material 167 retracts from the unbonded region and form low-stretch zone 701. In some configurations, the elastic material 167 may be cut into several discrete pieces. In turn, the low-stretch zones 701 define regions of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 that have relatively less elasticity than the high-stretch zones 703. The discrete elastic material 167 that has been cut and which are elastically contracted do not add any substantial amount of elastication to the low-stretch zone 701. As such, upon application of a force, the high-stretch zones 703 will elongate more than the low-stretch zones 701. As provided above, the terms “elastic,” “elastomer” or “elastomeric” refers to materials exhibiting elastic properties, which include any material that upon application of a force to its relaxed, initial length can stretch or elongate to an elongated length more than 10% greater than its initial length and will substantially recover back to about its initial length upon release of the applied force. In some configurations, the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 may be configured with high-stretch zones 703 that are elastic and may be configured with low-stretch zones 701 that are not elastic or “inelastic.”
  • As discussed above, the diaper pants 100P described with reference to FIGS. 1-3C may include one or more frangible pathways in the first belt 106 and/or the second belt 108. For example, FIGS. 4, 5A, and 5B show an example diaper pant 100P with a first belt 106 that includes frangible pathways 700. The frangible pathways 700 may be configured to allow the first elastic belt 106 to be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway 700, such as when removing the diaper pant 100P from a wearer. FIG. 5A shows a view of the diaper pant 100P from FIG. 4 , illustrating the first belt 106 after having been torn along the frangible pathway 700 through both the outer longitudinal outer laterally extending edge 107 a and the inner laterally extending edge 107 b of the first belt 106. As such, the first elastic belt 106 shown in FIG. 5A is separated by opposing tear lines 705. It is to be appreciated the first elastic belt 106 may be torn along both frangible pathways 700 in FIG. 5A. For example, FIG. 5B shows the diaper pant of FIG. 4 showing the front belt having been torn along two frangible pathways 700. As shown in Figure the central region 106 c of the first elastic belt 106 may remain bonded with the chassis 102 after separating the first and second opposing end regions 106 a, 106 b from the central region 106 c by tearing the elastic belt 106 along the frangible pathways 700.
  • As discussed in more detail below, the frangible pathways 700 may comprise a plurality of lines of weakness 704 configured such that all elastic strands 168 in the first elastic belt 106 are severed at least once in the frangible pathway 700. Severing the elastic strands 168 in the frangible pathway 700 helps make it relatively easier to tear the first elastic belt 106 along the frangible pathway 700. For example, when the elastic strands 168 are severed, the first substrate 162 and second substrate 164 of the first elastic belt 106 need only need to be torn without having to also tear uncut elastic strands 168. It is to be appreciated that the diaper pant 100P may include various quantities of frangible pathways 700 that may be: positioned in various locations; define various shapes; and extend for various lengths. For example, the first elastic belt 106 may comprise a first belt length defined by a longitudinal distance between the proximal edge 107 b and the distal edge 107 a, and the frangible pathway 700 may extend for a total length from an outermost edge of a line of weakness 704 nearest the proximal edge 107 b of the first belt 106 to an outermost edge of a line of weakness 704 nearest the distal edge 107 a of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the frangible pathway 700 may extend for a total length that is greater than, equal to, or less than the first belt length. In some configurations, the lines of weakness 704 may extend for a length from a first end to a second end, and a sum of the all the lengths of lines of weakness 704 in the frangible pathway 700 may be greater than the frangible pathway total length.
  • In some configurations, diaper pants 100P may be configured such that one or both of the first elastic belt 106 and the second elastic belt 108 include one or more frangible pathways 700. The frangible pathways 700 may be positioned in various locations on the first and second elastic belts 106, 108. For example, such as shown in FIGS. 4, 5A-5B, frangible pathways 700 may extend to overlap with the chassis 102. In some configurations, the frangible pathways 700 may extend in straight lines and/or may be curved and/or have curved portions. In some configurations, the frangible pathways 700 may extend longitudinally for the entire length or less than the entire length of the first belt 106 and/or second belt 108. In some configurations, frangible pathways 700 may be positioned partially or entirely laterally between the first and second side seams 178, 180 and the chassis 102.
  • In some configurations, the frangible pathways 700 may be configured and/or positioned to provide access to and/or function with other features, such as disposal features. For example, the diaper pant 100P shown in FIGS. 4, 5A, and 5B includes fastener components 707 positioned on the wearing facing surface 115 b of the first elastic belt 106. In some configurations, the fastener components 707 may be positioned between the first elastic belt 106 and the chassis 102. The fastener component 707 may be configured to refastenably connect with other portions of the diaper pant 100P, such as for example, the garment facing surfaces of the first elastic belt 106, the second elastic belt 108, or the chassis 102. As such, once the first elastic belt 106 is torn along the frangible pathways 700, the diaper pant 100P may be removed from a wearer and rolled or folded up for disposal, and the fastener component 707 may be connected with another portion of the diaper pant 100P to help maintain the diaper pant 100P in a disposal configuration.
  • It is also to be appreciated that the fastener component 707 may be configured in various ways, such as hooks, loops, and/or adhesive. For example, the fastener component 707 may comprise hook elements or adhesive adapted to refastenably connect with another surface of the diaper pant 100P. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may comprise loop elements adapted to refastenably connect with hook surface on the diaper pant 100P. The fastener component 707 may be a separate element connected with the elastic belt 106 in various ways, such as mechanical bonding, adhesive bonding, or both. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may be integrally formed from materials of the elastic belt 106, 108. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may be printed and/or comprise materials of various different colors such that the fastener component 707 may be visible from outside the diaper pant 100P.
  • As previously mentioned, the fastener component 707 may comprise a hook material that can refastenably engage with substrates, such as nonwovens for example, on an exterior surface of the diaper pant 100P. For example, the fastener component 707 may comprise a substrate comprising hooks, with the substrate bonded to the elastic belt 106, 108, such as the second substrate 164, which may be in the form of a nonwoven. It is to be appreciated that the substrate may be bonded to the elastic belt 106, 108 in various ways, such as for example, with mechanical bonds, thermal bonds, ultrasonic bonds, and/or adhesive bonds or combinations thereof. In some configurations, hooks may be integrally formed from the second substrate 164, which may be in the form of a nonwoven. The fastener component 707 may comprise one material or a combination of two or more materials arranged in at least partially overlapping configuration. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may comprise other fastener types as known in the art.
  • It is to be appreciated that the fastener component 707 may comprise any of a wide variety of shapes, including rectangles or other polygons, circles, ovals, shapes having exterior convexities or concavities or combinations thereof, or one or a plurality of lines or geometric shapes forming an array. It is to be appreciated that the fastener component 707 may comprise various sizes. For example, in some configurations, the fastener component 707 may have a lateral width of between about 5 mm and about 100 mm, specifically reciting all 0.1 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may have a longitudinal length of between about 10 mm and about 100 mm, specifically reciting all 0.1 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. The fastener component 707 may be aligned parallel the lateral centerline 126 a, 126 b of the elastic belt 106, 108 or may be oriented at an angle relative the longitudinal centerline 126 a, 126 of the elastic belt 106, 108 of between 0 and 90 degrees. The fastener component 707 may comprise an array of two or more spaced-apart fastening elements. The fastener component 707 may have a color that is visible through any layers of the elastic belt 106, 108 on which the fastener component 707 is located. The elastic belt 106, 108 and/or chassis 102 may include printing or other indicia highlighting to a caregiver the location, function, and/or usage of the fastener component 707. The bond, or bond pattern, attaching the fastener component 707 to the elastic belt 106, 108 may be visually or tactilely distinct from the surrounding belt material in order to provide the caregiver a signal or a mechanical grip advantage.
  • It is also to be appreciated that the frangible pathways 700 may comprise lines of weakness 704 that are: configured in various ways; positioned in various locations and orientations relative to each other; defined by various shapes; and extending for various lengths. For example, in some configurations, the lines of weakness 704 may comprise discrete cut lines that penetrate through some or all the layers of the elastic belt 106. In some configurations, the lines of weakness 704 comprise discrete bonds wherein materials of the first substrate and the second substrate are fused together. In some configurations, the lines of weakness 704 may be linear, curvilinear, or have a regular or irregular geometry and may comprise one or more of a perforation, a bond, an aperture, or a mechanically thinned region of a material such as a nonwoven, or a combination thereof. It is also to be appreciated that the lines of weakness 704 can be formed with different lengths and spacings to achieve different separation forces.
  • As discussed above, absorbent articles 100, such as diaper pants 100P, may be configured with frangible pathways 700 comprising lines of weakness 704 arranged in various ways to help improve a caregiver's ability to remove a soiled diaper pant 100P from a wearer without having to remove a soiled diaper pant from a wearer by sliding the soiled diaper pant down the wearer's legs. As discussed above, the frangible pathways 700 may be configured to allow the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 to be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway 700, such as when removing the diaper pant 100P from a wearer. In addition, the frangible pathways 700 may also be configured to provide access to fastener components 707 that may be used to help hold a soiled product in a disposal configuration. The following provides a discussion of example implementations of frangible pathways 700 on diaper pants 100P in the context of the above description of various details of absorbent articles 100, fastener components 707, frangible pathways 700, and lines weakness 704. It is to be appreciated that discussions of frangible pathways 700 in the first elastic belt 106 herein may also apply to frangible pathways 700 in the second elastic belt 108.
  • It is to be appreciated that frangible pathways 700 may be positioned in various locations and/or orientations relative to other components of the absorbent article 100 and/or may be configured to function in various ways to help facilitate removal of diaper pant from a wearer. For example, the diaper pant 100P shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B may include one or more frangible pathways 700 extending between a distal terminus 808 on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 and a proximal terminus 810 on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. As illustrated in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the diaper pant 100P includes a first frangible pathway 700 a and a second frangible pathway 700 b in the first belt 106. The first frangible pathway 700 a may extend between a first distal terminus 808 a on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 and a first proximal terminus 810 a on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. And the second frangible pathway 700 b may extend between a second distal terminus 808 b on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106 and a second proximal terminus 810 b on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. It is to be appreciated that the first and second frangible pathways 700 a, 700 b may comprise lines of weakness 704 as described above.
  • It is to be appreciated that the first distal terminus 808 a and the second distal terminus 808 b may be located in various lateral positions on the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106. For example, in some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned in the central region 106 c of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102. In some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned in the first end region 106 a and/or the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally outboard of the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102. In some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first side seam 178 and/or may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second side seam 180. In some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a may be laterally aligned with the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 or the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the second distal terminus 808 b may be laterally aligned with the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 or the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the second distal terminus 808 b may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106.
  • It is also to be appreciated that the first proximal terminus 810 a and the second proximal terminus 810 b may be located in various lateral positions on the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. For example, in some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned in the central region 106 c of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second distal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102. In some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned in the first end region 106 a and/or the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally outboard of the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102. In some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first side seam 178 and/or may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second side seam 180. In some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a may be laterally aligned with the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 or the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the first proximal terminus 810 a may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the second proximal terminus 810 b may be laterally aligned with the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 or the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the second proximal terminus 810 b may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106.
  • It is to be appreciated that the first distal terminus 808 a and the second distal terminus 808 b may be located in various longitudinal positions between the outer edge 107 a and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. And the first proximal terminus 810 a and the second proximal terminus 810 b may be located in various longitudinal positions between the outer edge 107 a and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. For example, in some configurations, the first distal terminus 808 a and/or the first proximal terminus 810 a may be located on the first side seam 178 at positions longitudinally inboard of the outer edge 107 a and longitudinally outboard of the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. Also, the second distal terminus 808 b and/or the second proximal terminus 810 b may be located on the second side seam 180 at positions longitudinally inboard of the outer edge 107 a and longitudinally outboard of the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. As such, completing the tearing process of the first belt 106 may also require tearing portions of the first and/or second side seams 178, 180.
  • With continued reference to FIG. 6B, the first belt 106 may also comprise grip regions 801 providing a place where a user may grasp a portion of the first belt 106 and begin the process of tearing the first belt along the frangible pathway 700. The grip region 801 may comprise an accessibility opening 802 in the first belt 106 and may also comprise a fastener component 707 positioned adjacent the accessibility opening 802. The accessibility opening 802 may comprise slits and/or openings in the first belt 106 and may penetrate through some or all layers of the first belt 106. It is to be appreciated that such slits or openings may be curved and/or straight. The accessibility opening 802 may also be considered part of the frangible pathway 700.
  • As shown in FIG. 6B, the diaper pant 100P may include a first grip region 801 a including a first accessibility opening 802 a and second grip region 801 b including a second accessibility opening 802 b in the first belt 106. The first and second accessibility openings 802 a, 802 b may be positioned between the outer edge 107 a and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. The first and second accessibility openings 802 a, 802 b may also be positioned in the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and may be positioned between the first longitudinal edge 128, the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102, and the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102. In addition, a first fastener component 707 a may be positioned adjacent the first accessibility opening 802 a, and a second fastener component 707 a may be positioned adjacent the second accessibility opening 802 a. The first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a first tear zone 813 a extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to the first distal terminus 808 a and a second tear zone 813 b extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to the first proximal terminus 810 a. The second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a first tear zone 813 a extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to the second distal terminus 808 b and a second tear zone 813 b extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to the second proximal terminus 810 b.
  • It is to be appreciated that the frangible pathways 700 may comprise one or more functional zones. In turn, the frangible pathways may comprise transition zones that may operatively connect such zones to help facilitate propagation of a tear along the frangible pathway 700 from one zone to another zone. The lines of weakness in the transition zones may be of particular lengths and/or angles relative to lateral centerlines and row spacing to help provide desired propagation of material failure when, for example, removing a product from a wearer. It is to be appreciated that the lengths, angles, and spacings in transition zones may be different from those in adjacent lines of weakness.
  • As shown in FIG. 6B for example, the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a first initial tear zone 815 a extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to a first transition zone 817 a. In addition, the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a first secondary tear zone 819 a extending from the first transition zone 817 a to the first distal terminus 808 a. The first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may also comprise a second initial tear zone 815 b extending from the first accessibility opening 802 a to a second transition zone 817 b. Further, the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a may comprise a second secondary tear zone 819 b extending from the second transition zone 817 b to the first proximal terminus 810 a. The first transition zone 817 a may operatively connect the first initial tear zone 815 a with the first secondary tear zone 819 a to help facilitate the propagation of the tear along the first frangible pathway 700 a from first initial tear zone 815 a to the first secondary tear zone 819 a. With continued reference to FIG. 6B, the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a first initial tear zone 815 a extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to a first transition zone 817 a. In addition, the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a secondary tear zone 819 a extending from the first transition zone 817 a to the second distal terminus 808 b. The first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may also comprise a second initial tear zone 815 b extending from the second accessibility opening 802 b to a second transition zone 817 b. Further, the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b may comprise a second secondary tear zone 819 b extending from the second transition zone 817 b to the second proximal terminus 810 b. The second transition zone 817 b may operatively connect the second initial tear zone 815 b with the second secondary tear zone 819 b to help facilitate the propagation of the tear along the second frangible pathway 700 b from second initial tear zone 815 b to the second secondary tear zone 819 b.
  • The accessibility opening 802 may help provide a caregiver or wearer access to and/or to grasp the fastener component 707 in the grip region 801 with a finger or thumb. The caregiver or user may then pull on grip region 801 to begin tearing the first belt 106 on the frangible pathway 700. In some configurations, tear lines may simultaneously propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b laterally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 toward the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810. As discussed in more detail below, the diaper pant 100P may also be configured such that a tear line propagating along the first tear zone 813 a and a tear line propagating along the second tear zone 813 b may reach the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810, respectively, simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. It is also to be appreciated that some diaper pants 100P herein may be configured to include a frangible pathway 700 that extends through or around the fastener component 707 without an accessibility opening. In turn, a user may pinch and/or pull the belt where the frangible pathway 700 is located at or adjacent the fastener component 707 to initiate the tearing process along the frangible pathway 700.
  • As shown in FIG. 6B, the frangible pathways 700 may be configured to extend laterally inward from the from the distal terminus 808 and/or the proximal terminus 810. In turn, portions of the frangible pathway 700 may extend to define an angle that is less than 90 degrees with respect to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. Portions of the frangible pathway may extend to define an angle that is less than about 90 degrees, or less than about 80 degrees, or less than about 75 degrees, or less than about 65 degrees, or less than about 45 degrees, or less than about 35 degrees, or less than about 25 degrees with respect to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. Thus, the frangible pathway may define an overall length that is greater than a longitudinal length LT1 of the first belt 106 and/or the longitudinal length LT2 of the second belt 108 discussed above with reference to FIGS. 2C-2E.
  • As discussed above, the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second belt 108 may be relatively easily torn along the frangible pathway 700, such as when removing the diaper pant 100P from a wearer. In addition, the first belt 106 may be separable along the first frangible pathway 700 a and the second frangible pathway 700 b to define a first belt zone 831, a second belt zone 832, and a third belt zone 833 positioned laterally between the first and second belt zones 831, 832.
  • Referring now to FIGS. 6A and 6B, when removing a diaper pant 100P from a wearer, a user may grab the first belt 106 in the grip region 801 by inserting one or more fingers and/or a thumb through the accessibility opening 802 to grasp a portion of the first belt 106 and fastener component 707. For example, with reference to FIGS. 6B and 6C, a caregiver may insert a finger or thumb through the first accessibility opening 802 a and grasp the first belt 106 and the first fastener component 707 a with a first hand. The caregiver's opposing second hand may be used to help stabilize the wearer. For example, the caregiver's opposing second hand may apply a holding or stabilizing force to the wearer at the central region 106 c of the first belt 106. The user's first hand may then exert a pulling force Fp on the first grip region 801 a of the first belt 106 outward away from the wearer to initiate a tearing of the first belt 106 along the first frangible pathway 700 a, such as shown in FIG. 6C.
  • With continued reference to FIG. 6C, a pulling force Fp (generally represented by an arrow) may be applied to the first grip region 801 a in a direction generally toward the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106 and the wearer. As the force Fp is applied, a first tear line 705 a and a second tear line 705 b may simultaneously propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b, respectively. The first tear line 705 a may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a along the first tear zone 813 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the first fastener component 707 a and then in a direction D1 that is generally laterally and longitudinally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first distal terminus 808 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106. Simultaneously, the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the first fastener component 707 a along the second tear zone 813 b of the first frangible pathway 700 a in a direction D2 that is generally laterally outward and longitudinally inward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first proximal terminus 810 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106.
  • In some configurations, the first tear line 705 a may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a along the first initial tear zone 815 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a to the first transition zone 817 a. From the first transition zone 817 a, the first tear line 705 a may then propagate along the first secondary tear zone 819 a to the first distal terminus 808 a. In addition, the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the first accessibility opening 802 a along the second initial tear zone 815 b of the first frangible pathway 700 a to the second transition zone 817 b. From the second transition zone 817 b, the second tear line 705 b may then propagate along the second secondary tear zone 819 b to the first proximal terminus 810 a. As discussed in more detail below, the first frangible pathway 700 a may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may reach first distal terminus 808 a and the first proximal terminus 810 a, respectively, at the same time or about the same time.
  • As shown in FIG. 6D, the first belt 106 may be separable along the first frangible pathway 700 a to define a first belt zone 831. For example, the first belt zone 831 may be formed once the first tear line 705 a propagates through the first distal terminus 808 a and the second tear line 705 b propagates through to the first proximal terminus 810 a, the first belt zone 831 may be formed. As shown in FIG. 6D, a first edge 831 a of the first belt zone 831 is formed by tearing the first frangible pathway 700 a. In addition, a first edge 833 a of the third belt zone 833 discussed in more detail below is also formed by tearing the first frangible pathway 700 a. The first belt zone 831 may extend from the first edge 831 a of the first and second tear lines 705 a, 705 b to the first side seam 178 or the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106. In addition, the first belt zone 831 may include the first fastener component 707 a. As discussed below, the first belt zone 831 may include the entirety of or a portion of first fastener component 707 a.
  • With the first belt zone 831 being defined by tearing the first belt 106 along the first frangible pathway 700 a, a user may proceed to define the second belt zone 832 by tearing the first belt 106 along the second frangible pathway 700 b. Referring now to FIGS. 6D and 6E, a caregiver may insert a finger or thumb through the second accessibility opening 802 b and grasp the first belt 106 and the second fastener component 707 b with a first hand. The caregiver's opposing second hand may be used to help stabilize the wearer. For example, the caregiver's opposing second hand may apply a holding or stabilizing force to the wearer at the central region 106 c of the first belt 106. The user's first hand may then exert a pulling force Fp on the second grip region 801 b of the first belt 106 outward away from the wearer to initiate a tearing of the first belt 106 along the second frangible pathway 700 b, such as shown in FIG. 6E.
  • With continued reference to FIG. 6E, a pulling force Fp (generally represented by an arrow) is applied to the second grip region 801 b in a direction generally toward the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106. As the pulling force Fp is applied, a first tear line 705 a and a second tear line 705 b may simultaneously propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b, respectively. The first tear line 705 a may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b along the first tear zone 813 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the second fastener component 707 b and then in a direction D1 that is generally laterally and longitudinally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the second distal terminus 808 b in the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106. Simultaneously, the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b in longitudinal and lateral directions partially through and adjacent to the second fastener component 707 b along the second tear zone 813 b of the second frangible pathway 700 b in a direction D2 that is generally laterally outward and longitudinally inward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the second proximal terminus 810 b in the second end region 106 b of the first belt 106.
  • In some configurations, the first tear line 705 a may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b along the first initial tear zone 815 a of the second frangible pathway 700 b to the first transition zone 817 a. From the first transition zone 817 a, the first tear line 705 a may then propagate along the first secondary tear zone 819 a to the second distal terminus 808 b. In addition, the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the second accessibility opening 802 b along the second initial tear zone 815 b of the second frangible pathway 700 b to the second transition zone 817 b. From the second transition zone 817 b, the second tear line 705 b may then propagate along the second secondary tear zone 819 b to the second proximal terminus 810 b. As discussed in more detail below, the second frangible pathway 700 b may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may reach second distal terminus 808 b and the second proximal terminus 810 b, respectively, at the same time or about the same time.
  • As shown in FIG. 6F, the first belt 106 may be separable along the second frangible pathway 700 b to define a second belt zone 832 and a third belt zone 833. For example, the second belt zone 832 may be formed once the first tear line 705 a propagates through the second distal terminus 808 b and the second tear line 705 b propagates through to the second proximal terminus 810 b, the second belt zone 832 may be formed. As shown in FIG. 6F, a first edge 832 a of the second belt zone 832 is formed by tearing the second frangible pathway 700 b. In addition, a second edge 833 b of the third belt zone 833 is also formed by tearing the second frangible pathway 700 b. The second belt zone 832 may extend from the first edge 832 a of the first and second tear lines 705 a, 705 b to the second side seam 180 or the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106. In addition, the second belt zone 832 may include the second fastener component 707 b. The third belt zone 833 may extend laterally between the first edge 833 a and the second edge 833 b and may remain connected with the chassis 102.
  • Although the tearing process is described above with reference to FIGS. 6A-6F as tearing the first belt 106 along the first frangible pathway 700 a before tearing the first belt along the second frangible pathway 700 b, it is to be appreciated that the tearing of first belt 106 along the frangible pathways 700 may occur in various different orders and in different manners. For example, the first belt 106 may be torn along second frangible pathway 700 b to define the second belt zone 832 before tearing the first belt 106 along the first frangible pathway 700 a to define the first belt zone 831. In another example, the first belt 106 may be torn simultaneously along the first frangible pathway 700 a and the second frangible pathway 700 b to define the first belt zone 831, the second belt zone 832, and the third belt zone 833.
  • Once the first belt 106 is torn along the frangible pathways 700 to define the first belt zone 831, the second belt zone 832, and the third belt zone 833, the diaper pant 100P may be removed from a wearer in a manner similar to that of a conventional taped diaper. After being removed from a wearer, the diaper pant 100P may be placed in a disposal configuration.
  • As described above, frangible pathways 700 may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may propagate to reach the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810, respectively, simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. Such simultaneous tear propagation and tear termination may help provide a caregiver with a convenient and confident diaper pant removal experience. As mentioned above, on occasions when one of the first tear line 705 a or the second tear line propagates through the distal terminus 808 or the proximal terminus 810, respectively, significantly in advance of the other tear line, the pulling force needed to complete the tearing may be reduced. In turn, the reduction of force may cause the caregiver to believe the tearing is completed and to stop the tearing process before completion. As such, the caregiver may need to initiate a second tearing motion to complete the tearing process.
  • As discussed above, the frangible pathways 700 may comprise individual lines of weakness 704. In some configurations, a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the first tear zone 813 a may be equal to or substantially equal to a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the second tear zone 813 b. In some configurations, a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the first tear zone 813 a may be different from a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the second tear zone 813 b. The sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the first tear zone 813 a may be different from a sum of the lengths of the lines of weakness 704 of the second tear zone 813 b by from about 1% to about 10%.
  • As discussed above, frangible pathways 700 may be configured with first and second tear zones 813 a, 813 b wherein first and second tear lines 705 a, 705 b propagate through the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810, respectively. In some configurations, frangible pathways 700 may be configured with first and second tear zones 813 a, 813 b wherein the first tear line 705 a or the second tear line 705 b may propagate through the distal terminus 808 or the proximal terminus 810, respectively, before the other.
  • It is to be appreciated that frangible pathways 700 may be configured with an accessibility opening 802, a first tear zone 813 a, and a second tear zone 813 b arranged such that the lengths of the first and second tear zones may not be equal or substantially equal, such as shown for example in FIGS. 7A and 7B. For example, as discussed below in more detail, the frangible pathways illustrated in FIGS. 7A and 7B may be configured to be operated with a two step tearing process that comprises a first step of tearing the belt along first and second initial tear zones 815 a, 815 b to the first and second transition zones 817 a, 817 b, and then subsequently and simultaneously tearing first and second secondary tear zones 819 a, 819 b from the first and second transition zones 817 a, 817 b to the distal terminus 808 and the proximal terminus 810, respectively.
  • Referring now to FIGS. 7A and 7B, when removing a diaper pant 100P from a wearer, a user may grab the first belt 106 in the grip region 801 by inserting one or more fingers and/or a thumb through the accessibility opening 802 to grasp a portion of the first belt 106 and fastener component 707. For example, with reference to FIGS. 7B and 7C, a caregiver may insert a finger or thumb through the first accessibility opening 802 a and grasp the first belt 106 and the first fastener component 707 a with a first hand. The caregiver's opposing second hand may be used to help stabilize the wearer, as discussed above. The user's first hand may then exert an initial tear force Fit (generally represented by a curved arrow) on the first grip region 801 a of the first belt 106 outward away from the wearer to initiate a tearing of the first belt 106 along the first initial tear zone 815 a and the second initial tear zone 815 b, such as shown in FIG. 7C. As the initial tear force Fit is applied, a first tear line 705 a may propagate from the accessibility opening 802 along the first initial tear zone 815 a in longitudinal and lateral directions around the first fastener component 707 a and then to the first transition zone 817 a, such as shown in FIGS. 7C and 7D. In addition, a second tear line 705 b may propagate in a lateral direction from the accessibility opening 802 along the second initial tear zone 815 b to the second transition zone 817 b.
  • With reference to FIGS. 7D and 7E, once the first initial tear zone 815 a and the second initial tear zone 815 b are completely separated, a pulling force Fp (generally represented by an arrow) may be applied to the first grip region 801 a in a direction generally toward the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106 and the wearer. As the pulling force Fp is applied, the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may simultaneously propagate along the first secondary tear zone 819 a and the second secondary tear zone 819 b, respectively. The first tear line 705 a may propagate from the first transition zone 817 a along the first secondary tear zone 819 a of the first frangible pathway 700 a in a direction D1 that is generally laterally and longitudinally outward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first distal terminus 808 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106. Simultaneously, the second tear line 705 b may propagate from the second transition zone 817 b along the second secondary tear zone 819 b of the first frangible pathway 700 a in a direction D2 that is generally laterally outward and longitudinally inward from the central region 106 c of the first belt 106 and toward the first proximal terminus 810 a in the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106. As shown in FIGS. 7E and 7F, the second frangible pathway 700 b may be configured such that the first tear line 705 a and the second tear line 705 b may reach second distal terminus 808 b and the second proximal terminus 810 b, respectively, at the same time or about the same time. It is to be appreciated that the frangible pathways 700 may be configured in various different ways with various zones having different lengths. It is also to be appreciated that the belt may comprise one or more substrates and the frangible pathway may extend through each of the one or more substrates, and the frangible pathway extending through two or more substrates forming the belt may be aligned, such that the frangible pathway of the first substrate is aligned with the frangible pathway of the second substrate. Alternatively, the frangible pathways extending through two or more substrates forming the belt may not be aligned or is partially aligned, such that at least a portion of the frangible pathway of the first substrate is offset with the frangible pathway of the second substrate.
  • As previously discussed, with reference to FIGS. 6C, 7D, and 7E, the pulling force Fp may be applied in a direction generally toward the first end region 106 a of the first belt 106 and/or outward away from the first belt 106 and the wearer. As the force Fp is applied, a first tear line 705 a and a second tear line 705 b may propagate along the first tear zone 813 a and the second tear zone 813 b, respectively. However, due to the direction in which the pulling force is executed, the tear could propagate in an unintended tear direction UTD, such as indicated in FIG. 8A. An unintended tear direction UTD is any tearing of the belt other than along the frangible pathway when the user is attempting to tear along the frangible pathway. It is to be appreciated that this tearing may occur in one or more layers of the belt. If the tear were to propagate in the unintended tear direction UTD rather than along the frangible pathway, this would adversely interfere with the removal of the absorbent article. For example, if one frangible pathway tears significantly before the other because a portion of the tear extends into a portion of the belt rather than along the frangible pathway, the caregiver may sense or feel a change in force, and thus, may stop the tearing motion, assuming the tear along both tear zones is complete. Upon realizing that the tear is not complete, the caregiver may have to re-grip the belt and complete the tear of the incompletely torn frangible pathway in a separate step. Such starting, stopping, and restarting the tearing process may require the user utilize both hands and may require additional time to complete the removal of the article from a wearer. In another example, if the tear propagates in the unintended tear direction, the caregiver may not be able to complete the tear to remove the absorbent article in a manner similar to a taped-type absorbent article and, alternatively, would be forced to remove the absorbent article over the legs of the wearer causing the contents of the absorbent article to be unsecured and next to the skin of the wearer during removal. Thus, it is important to design the frangible pathway such that the tear does not propagate along the unintended tear direction UTD, but rather along the frangible pathway.
  • Referring to FIGS. 9A-9C, the frangible pathway 700 may extend in a first pathway direction FPD and the force to tear FT may be in a second direction. The first pathway direction FPD may be different than the force to tear FT in the second direction. Alternatively, the first pathway direction FPD may be the same as the force to tear FT in the second direction. When the first pathway direction FPD is different than the force to tear in the second direction, it may be more likely that the tear wants to propagate in an unintended tear direction UTD. As previously stated, the substrate, also referred to herein as a material, having the frangible pathway may be weaker in one or more directions due to the characteristics of the material. For example, the frangible pathway may extend through at least a portion of a nonwoven material. The nonwoven material may include a plurality of fibers oriented in a fiber orientation direction and having a bond pattern that holds together the fibers to form the nonwoven. When the force to tear FT the frangible pathway includes a force component that is in a direction parallel or substantially parallel to the weakest direction of the material through which the frangible pathway extends, the pathway tear strength needs to be sufficiently less than the belt tear strength to prevent tearing in an unintended tear direction. FIGS. 9A-9C illustrate various examples of the frangible pathway 700 having a frangible pathway direction and a force to tear FT having a direction, and the force to tear FT having each of a horizontal force to tear component FT H and a vertical force to tear component FTv. Due to the force to tear FT having directional components that are substantially parallel to the weakest material direction or weakest substrate direction, the tear may be more susceptible to propagate outside of the frangible pathway.
  • To avoid tearing in the belt and/or one or more layers of the substrate in an unintended tear direction, it has been found that the tear strength of the belt should be greater than the tear strength of the frangible pathway. The difference between the tear strength of the belt and the tear strength of the frangible pathway are such that the tear remains on the frangible pathway.
  • The characteristics of the belt determine the belt tear strength. The belt 106, 108 may comprise one or more substrates, such as a first substrate 162, and/or second substrate 164, and may be constructed from various materials. For example, the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162, and/or second substrate 164 that may be manufactured from materials such as plastic films; apertured plastic films; woven or nonwoven webs of natural materials (e.g., wood or cotton fibers), synthetic fibers (e.g., polyolefins, polyamides, polyester, polyethylene, or polypropylene fibers) or a combination of natural and/or synthetic fibers; or coated woven or nonwoven webs. In some configurations, the first and/or second belts may include a first substrate 162, and/or second substrate 164 comprising a nonwoven web of synthetic fibers and may include a stretchable nonwoven. The type of materials used for the one or more substrates of the belt influences the belt tear strength.
  • Further, nonwoven belts are manufactured using various techniques in which, generally, fibers are laid down onto a carrier and one or more bond patterns may be used to secure of the fibers of the substrate. The direction in which the carrier is moving, the machine direction MD, into which the fibers are laid down is the direction in which the majority of the fibers of the substrate are oriented, referred to herein as a fiber orientation direction. The shape and density of bonds throughout the substrate also influences the strength of the belt. Thus, the belt may be stronger along certain axes given the fiber orientation direction and the characteristics of the bond pattern. Example bond patterns in various configurations are described in U.S. Patent Publication Nos. 2017/0000663; 2014/0088535; 2016/0324698; and 2016/0101003; and U.S. Pat. Nos. 9,993,369; 10,028,866; and 9,408,761, all of which are incorporated by reference herein. Generally, the larger the open areas, areas devoid of bonds, the lower the material strength. The substrate, which may be an outer garment facing surface, an inner wearer facing surface, or an intermediate layer of the belt, may include a plurality of fibers having a denier of less than about 1.5 or less than about 1.2 or less than about 1. specifically reciting all 0.1 increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • Further still, the belt and, individually, the one or more substrates forming the belt may have a basis weight. Generally, the higher the basis weight of the substrate and/or the belt, the greater the tear strength of the belt and/or substrate. The basis weight of the one or more substrates may be optimized so that the desired tear strength is reached without sacrificing too much softness. Stated another way, the higher the basis weight of the one or more substrates, the greater the stiffness of the one or more substrates. Thus, the basis weight may be selected such that it provides the necessary strength to the substrate while being soft against the wearer's skin during use. The basis weight of the belt may be less than about 60 gsm or less than about 50 gsm less than about gsm or less than about 40 gsm or less than about 35 gsm or less than about 30 gsm or less than about 25 gsm or less than about 20 gsm, specifically reciting all 0.1 gsm increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. The basis weight of the belt is the sum of the basis weight for each substrate layer used to form the belt, which may be one or more substrates. The substrate may have a basis weight of less than about 30 gsm, or less than about 25 gsm, or less than about 20 gsm or less than about 15 gsm or less than about 10 gsm or less than about 8 gsm or from about 6 gsm to about 30 gsm or from about 8 gsm or about 20 gsm or from about 8 gsm to about 11 gsm, specifically reciting all 0.1 gsm increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • It is to be appreciated that the substrate may include a softness enhancer additive to increase the softness of the substrate. Thus, a higher basis weight material may be used to achieve greater strength and a softness enhancer additive may be used to impart softness to the substrate. The softness enhancer additive may be added to the composition in neat form, diluted, and/or as a masterbatch in, for example, polyolefin polymers such as polypropylene, polystyrene, low density polyethylene, high density polyethylene, or propylene-alpha-olefin copolymers. A composition suitable to make fibers as described herein contains one or more softness enhancer additive, which can be present in an amount of between 0.01% to 10%, or between 0.05% to 5%, or between 0.3% to 1%, or between 0.01% to 1%, or between 0.2% to 0.5% by weight of the fibers, specifically reciting all 0.1% increments within the above recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. Example softness enhancer additives in various configurations are disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 9,993,369, which is incorporated by reference herein. The softness enhancer additive may be on a single side, such as the garment facing surface or the wearer facing surface of the belt. The softness enhance additive may be present in different amounts on each of the garment facing surface of the belt and the wearer facing surface of the belt.
  • At least a portion of the frangible pathway 700 may be at a pathway angle β with respect to lateral centerline of the elastic belt 126 a, 126 b through which the frangible pathway may extend. The frangible pathway angle β may be less than 90 degrees or less than 85 degrees or less than 75 degrees or less than 65 degrees or less than 45 degrees or less than 35 degrees or less than 25 degrees or less than 15 degrees. The frangible pathway angle β may be from 0 degrees to 85 degrees or from about 15 degrees to about 75 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 45 degrees or from about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees, specifically reciting all 0.1 degree increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 8A, the frangible pathway 700 may include a first frangible pathway 700 a and a second frangible pathway 700 b. Each of the first frangible pathway 700 a and the second frangible pathway 700 b may from a pathway angle β with respect to the lateral centerline of the first elastic belt 126 a. FIGS. 9A-9C illustrate examples of frangible pathways 700 having a frangible pathway angle β with respect to the lateral centerline 126 a. It is to be appreciated that the frangible pathway angle may apply to the entire frangible pathway or one or more portions of the frangible pathway may have a frangible pathway angle as described herein.
  • Additionally or alternatively, at least a portion of the frangible pathway 700 may be at a pathway angle α with respect to fiber orientation direction 720 of the substrate through which the frangible pathway extends. The fiber orientation direction 720, as previously discussed, is the direction in which the majority of the fibers are oriented, which is substantially parallel to the machine direction in which the fibers are laid down during the production process. The pathway angle α may be less than 90 degrees or less than 80 degrees or less than 75 degrees or less than 65 degrees or less than 45 degrees or less than 35 degrees or less than 25 degrees or less than 15 degrees, specifically reciting all 0.1 degree increments within the above recited ranges and all ranges formed therein or thereby. The frangible pathway angle α may be from 0 degrees to 85 degrees or from about 15 degrees to about 75 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 60 degrees or from about 30 degrees to about 45 degrees or from about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees, specifically reciting all 0.1 degree increments within the above recited ranges and all ranges formed therein or thereby. For example, FIGS. 9D-9E illustrate examples of frangible pathways 700 having a frangible pathway angle α with respect to the fiber orientation direction 720. The fiber orientation direction may be substantially parallel to the lateral centerline 126 a of the belt or at an angle with respect to the lateral centerline of the belt. Generally, the greater the frangible pathway angle α with respect to the fiber orientation direction 720, the more likely the tear may propagate in the unintended tear direction and, thus, the greater the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength to prevent the tear from propagating in the unintended tear direction.
  • It has been found that to prevent tearing in an unintended tear direction UTD, the tear strength of the belt, referred to herein as the belt tear strength, must be greater than the tear strength of the frangible pathway, referred to herein as the pathway tear strength. Stated another way, the pathway tear strength must be less than the belt tear strength. More specifically, the difference between the pathway tear strength, according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and the belt tear strength, according to the Material Tear Strength test method, may be greater than about 3 N or greater than about 5 N or greater than about 8 N or greater than about 10 N or greater than about 15 N or greater than about 20 N or from about 4 N to about 30 N or from about 4 N to about N or from about 5 N to about 20 N or from about 10 N to about 20 N or from about 15 N to about 20 N, specifically reciting all 0.1 N increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. Generally, the larger the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength the more unlikely the tear will propagate in an unintended tear direction. However, strength must be balanced with softness and other material properties so that the belt can be used comfortably against the skin of the wearer. Each of the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength may be such that the belt maintains proper position of the absorbent article during use and the pathway tear strength maintains closure of the belt during use and ease of opening during removal of the diaper pant. The pathway tear strength may be greater than about 2 N or greater than about 3 N or greater than about 5 N or greater than about 10 N or greater than about 15 N or from about 2 N to about 20 N or from about 2 N to about 16 N or from about 5 N to about 10 N or from about 6 N to about 8 N, according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method disclosed herein, and specifically reciting all 0.1 N increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. The belt tear strength may be greater than about 4 N or greater than about 6 N or greater than about 8 N or greater than about 12 N or greater than about 20 N or greater than about 25 N or greater than about 30 N or from about 4 N to about 40 N or from about 7 N to about N or from about 8 N to about 20 N or from about 8 N to about 15 N or from about 8 N to about N, according to the Material Tear Strength test method disclosed herein, and specifically reciting all 0.1 N increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. It is to be appreciated that the frangible pathway may include a first tear zone and a second tear zone, as previously discussed. FIG. 10 illustrates graphically the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength that each may be calculated using the Material Tear Strength test method and the Pathway Tear Strength test method, respectively. It is also to be appreciated that the belt may include one or more substrate layers and one or more elastics. The elastics are severed in the region of the frangible pathway as to not interfere with tearing along the frangible pathway.
  • The difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength may also be described with reference to the standard deviation. More specifically, the belt may include a belt tear strength and a belt standard deviation according to the Material Tear Strength test method. Similarly, the frangible pathway may include a pathway tear strength and a pathway standard deviation, according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method. A standard deviation factor FStDev of at least about 2 may be used to sufficiently separate the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength. The standard deviation factor FStDev may be at least 4 or at least 6 or from about 2 to about 4 or from about 2 to about 6, specifically reciting all 0.1 increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. The belt tear strength minus the standard deviation factor FStDev multiplied by the belt standard deviation is greater than the pathway tear strength plus the standard deviation factor FStDev multiplied by the pathway standard deviation. FIG. 11 illustrates, graphically, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength as related to standard deviation of the belt and pathway.
  • In addition to having sufficient tear strength, the belt may also be softness so that the diaper pant is comfortable for wearing. The belt may comprise one or more surfaces which comprise an Average TS7 value of about 10 dB V2 rms or less, or about 7 dB V2 rms or less, or about 5 dB V2 rms or less, or from about 1 dB V2 rms to about 10 dB V2 rms, or from about 2 dB V2 rms to about 8 dB V2 rms according to the Softness Test Method herein, specifically reciting all 0.1 dB V2 rms increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. Additionally or alternatively, the belt may comprise one or more surfaces with an Average TS750 value of about dB V2 rms or less, or about 50 dB V2 rms or less, or about 25 dB V2 rms or less, or about 15 dB V2 rms or less, or from about 10 dB V2 rms to about 100 dB V2 rms, or from about 10 dB V2 rms to about 80 dB V2 rms, or from about 15 dB V2 rms to about 75 dB V2 rms according to the Softness Test Method herein, specifically reciting all 0.1 dB V2 rms increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. A substrate of the belt may comprise one or more surfaces with an Average TS750 value of about 11 dB V2 rms or less, or about 10 dB V2 rms or less, or about 5 dB V2 rms or less, or from about 1 dB V2 rms to about 11 dB V2 rms, or from about 1.5 dB V2 rms to about 6 dB V2 rms, or from about 2 dB V2 rms to about 4 dB V2 rms according to the Softness Test Method herein, reciting for each range every 0.1 dB V2 rms increment therein. Lower TS7 and TS750 values indicate greater softness, which is highly desirable in absorbent articles. Consumers might find absorbent articles with high TS7 and TS750 values uncomfortable and/or scratchy or otherwise undesirable.
  • The following are several example embodiments. Data for Examples 1-6 is included in Tables 1 and 2 below. Additionally, FIGS. 12-17 illustrate the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength for each of Examples 1-6. Each of Examples 1-6 included a belt having a first substrate and a second substrate. Each of the first substrate and the second substrate has a basis weight and is made from a certain material, as indicated in each of Table 1 and Table 2. The pathway tear strength, the belt tear strength, and the standard deviation of each of the belt and the frangible pathway was generated using the Pathway Tear Strength test method and the Material Tear Strength test method as disclosed herein.
  • Examples 1-3 include belts comprising a first and second substrate each having a basis weight and the combined basis weight for each of Examples 1-3 is different. The frangible pathway for each of Examples 1-3 is the same, having a pathway angle at 35 degrees. Thus, for Examples 1-3 the basis weight is different and the pathway angle is the same. As outlined in Table 1 and as illustrated in FIGS. 12 and 13 , Examples 1 and 2 include a belt having a pathway tear strength and a belt tear strength that are sufficiently different that when tearing along the frangible pathway, the tear will be more inclined to propagate along the frangible pathway than in an unintended tear direction. Example 3 includes a belt having a pathway tear strength and a belt tear strength that are not sufficiently different, as illustrated in FIG. 14 , that when tearing along the frangible pathway, the tear will be more inclined to propagate in an unintended tear direction than along the frangible pathway.
  • Examples 4-6 include belts comprising a first and second substrate each having a basis weight and the combined basis weight for each of Examples 4-6 is the same. The frangible pathway for each of Examples 4-6 is different, the pathway angle varies from 30 degrees to 40 degrees. In summary, for Examples 4-6 the basis weight is the same and the pathway angle is different. As outlined in the Table 1 and as illustrated in FIG. 15-17 , Examples 4-6 include a belt having a pathway tear strength and a belt tear strength that are sufficiently different that when tearing along the frangible pathway at varying pathway angles, the tear will be more inclined to propagate along the frangible pathway than in an unintended tear direction. As the pathway angle approaches the lateral centerline of the belt, the pathway tear strength decreases and the delta tear strength increases.
  • TABLE 1
    Combined Pathway Belt Delta
    Basis Pathway Tear Tear Tear
    Substrate Substrate Weight Angle Strength Strength Strength
    1 2 (gsm) (degrees) (N) (N) (N)
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 35 6.40 19.03 12.63
    1 Bicomponent Spunbond
    Example 17 gsm 25 gsm 42 35 8.56 26.5 17.93
    2 Spunbond Spunbond
    Example 11 gsm 11 gsm 22 35 6.42 7.73 1.31
    3 SMS SMS
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 30 5.42 19.03 13.62
    4 Bicomponent Spunbond
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 35 6.89 19.03 12.15
    5 Bicomponent Spunbond
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 40 9.39 19.03 9.65
    6 Bicomponent Spunbond
  • As previously discussed, the standard deviation is another way to analyze a belt comprising a frangible pathway to determine whether the tear will propagate along the frangible pathway and be deterred from propagating in an unintended tear direction. For each of Examples 1-6 the standard deviation was determine using the Pathway Tear Strength and the Material Test Strength test methods disclosed herein. As stated above, for Examples 1-3 the basis weight is varied while having a constant pathway angle, and for Examples 4-6 the basis weight is constant, and the pathway angle is varied. As previously discussed, a standard deviation factor may be used to determine the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength and ensure there is sufficient difference between these tear strengths. The Delta Tear Strength & FStDev data is determined by the following equation: (belt tear strength−(FStDev×belt standard deviation))−(pathway tear strength+(FStDev×pathway standard deviation)), which is directed to the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength using the standard deviation. As previously discussed, the belt tear strength must be greater than the pathway tear strength to prevent tearing in an unintended tear direction along the frangible pathway. As outlined in Table 2, the belt of Example 1 has a sufficient difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 1, 2 and 3. However, for Example 1, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 4 is insufficient and the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction. For Example 2, the belt tear strength is greater than the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 1-4, and thus, the tear will be inclined to propagate along the frangible pathway of belt and not in an unintended tear direction. For Example 3, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 1-4 are insufficient, and thus, the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction. The belt of Example 4, the belt tear strength is greater than the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 1-4. The belt of Example 5 has a sufficient difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 1-3. However, for Example 5, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 4 is insufficient, and the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction. The belt of Example 6 has a sufficient difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 1 and 2. However, for Example 6, the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength at FStDev of 3 and 4 is insufficient, and the belt will be prone to tearing in an unintended tear direction. Generally, the greater the difference between the belt tear strength and the pathway tear strength, the more inclined the tear will remain on the frangible pathway when tearing and the less likely the tear will propagate in an unintended tear direction.
  • TABLE 2
    Delta Delta Delta Delta
    Tear Tear Tear Tear
    Combined Pathway Belt Strength & Strength & Strength & Strength &
    Basis Pathway Standard Standard FStDev FStDev FStDev FStDev
    Substrate Substrate Weight Angle Deviation Deviation (N) (N) (N) (N)
    1 2 (gsm) (degrees) (N) (N) FStDev = 1 FStDev = 2 FStDev = 3 FStDev = 4
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 35 1.51 2.36 8.76 4.89 1.02 −2.86
    1 Bicomponent Spunbond
    Example 17 gsm 25 gsm 42 35 1.18 2.30 14.46 10.98 7.50 4.02
    2 Spunbond Spunbond
    Example 11 gsm 11 gsm 22 35 1.09 1.12 −0.89 −3.10 −5.30 −7.50
    3 SMS SMS
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 30 0.97 2.36 10.29 6.95 3.62 0.29
    4 Bicomponent Spunbond
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 35 1.08 2.36 8.71 5.27 1.83 −1.60
    5 Bicomponent Spunbond
    Example 17 gsm 15 gsm 32 40 2.02 2.36 5.27 0.89 −3.48 −7.86
    6 Bicomponent Spunbond
  • With reference to various aspects of the Figures described above, it is to be appreciated that grip regions 801 and accessibility openings 802 may be located in various positions in the first end region 106 a, the second end region 106 b, and/or the central region 106 c of the first belt 106. Grip regions 801 and accessibility openings 802 may be positioned between the first longitudinal side edge 111 a, the second longitudinal side edge 111 b, the outer edge 107 a, and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. For example, the first accessibility opening 802 a and/or the second accessibility 802 b may be entirely laterally positioned between the first longitudinal edge 128 and the second longitudinal edge 130 of the chassis 102. In some configurations, the first accessibility opening 802 a may be positioned laterally between the first longitudinal side edge 128 of the chassis 102 and the first longitudinal side edge 111 a of the first belt 106 and/or first side seam 178. In some configurations, the second accessibility opening 802 b may be positioned laterally between the second longitudinal side edge 130 of the chassis 102 and the second longitudinal side edge 111 b of the first belt 106 and/or second side seam 180. In some configurations, the first accessibility opening 802 a and/or the second accessibility opening 802 b may be positioned longitudinally between the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102 and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106 and/or may be positioned longitudinally between the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102 and the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the first accessibility opening 802 a may extend across the first longitudinal edge 128 and/or the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102, and/or the second accessibility opening 802 b may extend across the second longitudinal edge 130 and/or the first lateral edge 144 of the chassis 102.
  • It is also be appreciated that accessibility openings 802 may be located in various positions relative to fastener components 707. For example, in some configurations, the accessibility opening 802 may be positioned longitudinally between the fastener component 707 and the outer edge 107 a of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the accessibility opening 802 may be positioned longitudinally between the fastener component 707 and the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the accessibility opening 802 may be positioned laterally inboard of the fastener component 707. It is also to be appreciated that more than one accessibility opening 802 may be located adjacent a fastener component 707. As discussed in more detail below, the accessibility opening 802 may also be configured to extend partially or entirely through a fastener component 707 and may divide a fastener component 707 into two or more parts.
  • As mentioned above, the accessibility opening 802 may comprise slits and/or openings in the first belt 106 and may be curved and/or straight. It is to be appreciated that the accessibility openings 802 may also be oriented in various ways. For example, the accessibility opening 802 may be generally oriented perpendicularly relative to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the accessibility opening 802 may be generally oriented parallel relative to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106. In some configurations, the accessibility opening 802 may comprise a slit that extends along a line in a lateral direction to define an angle from about 0 degrees to about 45 degrees with respect to the outer edge 107 a and/or the inner edge 107 b of the first belt 106, specifically reciting all 1 degree increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby. In some configurations, the accessibility opening 802 may define a length dimension in the range of about mm to about 50 mm, specifically reciting all 0.1 mm increments within the above-recited range and all ranges formed therein or thereby.
  • As discussed above, the diaper pant 100P may include one or more fastener components 707 adapted to refastenably connect with at least one other component of the diaper pant 100P in a disposal configuration. It is to be appreciated that the fastener components 707 may be configured in various shapes and sizes and may be located in various positions relative to other components of the diaper pant 100P. As shown in FIG. 18 , in some configurations, fastener components 707 may be positioned on and connected with the wearer facing surface 115 b of the first elastic belt 106 and/or the second elastic belt 108 in a region where the first elastic belt 106 and/or second elastic belt 108 overlaps the chassis 102. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may be sandwiched between the second substrate 164 of the first elastic belt 106 or the second elastic belt 108 and the backsheet 136 of the chassis 102. In some configurations, such as shown in FIG. 18 , the fastener component 707 comprises hooks 715 protruding from a base 717, and the hooks 715 extend from the first belt 106 toward the backsheet 136. The fastener component 707 may be configured as a separate discrete element that may be connected with the wearer facing surface 115 b of the first belt 106 in various ways. For example, as shown in FIG. 18 . adhesive 716 may connect the base 717 of the fastener component 707 with wearer facing surface 115 b of the first belt 106. It is to be appreciated that the fastener component 707 may be connected with the first belt 106 by mechanical bonding in addition to or instead of adhesive. It is to be appreciated that the base 717 may be configured in various ways. For example, the base 717 may comprise a thermoplastic film. In some configurations, the base 717 may comprise a laminate with various layers bonded together, such as disclosed for example in U.S. Patent Publication No. 2021/0045931 A1. For example, the base 717 may comprise a thermoplastic film layer bonded with a nonwoven layer. It is to be appreciated that such layers may be bonded together in various ways, such as with adhesive, mechanical bonding, and/or extrusion bonding. In some configurations, the fastener component 707 may be integrally formed from materials of the first belt 106, such as shown for example in FIG. 19 , or may be integrally formed from materials and attached with the first belt.
  • Components of the absorbent articles described herein may at least partially be comprised of bio-based content as described in U.S. Pat. Appl. No. 2007/0219521A1. For example, the superabsorbent polymer component may be bio-based via their derivation from bio-based acrylic acid. Bio-based acrylic acid and methods of production are further described in U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. No. 2007/0219521 and U.S. Pat. Nos. 8,703,450; 9,630,901 and 9,822,197. Other components, for example nonwoven and film components, may comprise bio-based polyolefin materials. Bio-based polyolefins are further discussed in U.S. Pat. Appl. Pub. Nos. 2011/0139657, 2011/0139658, 2011/0152812, and 2016/0206774, and U.S. Pat. No. 9,169,366. Example bio-based polyolefins for use in the present disclosure comprise polymers available under the designations SHA7260 ™, SHE150 ™, or SGM9450F™ (all available from Braskem S.A.).
  • An absorbent article component may comprise a bio-based content value from about 10% to about 100%, from about 25% to about 100%, from about 40% to about 100%, from about 50% to about 100%, from about 75% to about 100%, or from about 90% to about 100%, for example, using ASTM D6866-10, method B.
  • Components of the absorbent articles described herein may be recycled for other uses, whether they are formed, at least in part, from recyclable materials. Examples of absorbent article materials that may be recycled are nonwovens, films, fluff pulp, and superabsorbent polymers. The recycling process may use an autoclave for sterilizing the absorbent articles, after which the absorbent articles may be shredded and separated into different byproduct streams. Example byproduct streams may comprise plastic, superabsorbent polymer, and cellulose fiber, such as pulp. These byproduct streams may be used in the production of fertilizers, plastic articles of manufacture, paper products, viscose, construction materials, absorbent pads for pets or on hospital beds, and/or for other uses. Further details regarding absorbent articles that aid in recycling, designs of recycle friendly diapers, and designs of recycle friendly and bio-based component diapers, are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Appl. Publ. No. 2019/0192723, published on Jun. 27, 2019.
  • Test Methods Pathway Tear Strength Test Method
  • In the Pathway Tear Strength Test Method, a belt material sample containing a frangible pathway is torn along the frangible pathway using a constant rate of extension tensile tester, and the load during tearing is measured. Material is preconditioned to 23±1° C. and 50±2% RH for at least two hours prior to testing, and all sample preparation and testing is carried out under these same conditions.
  • Sample Identification and Preparation
  • Belts side seams are separated by hand. Belts containing frangible path way(s) are not separated from finished articles. Any cuts, tabs, or other features present along the frangible pathway to facilitate tearing of the frangible pathway are noted, as such features will be used in the tensile pull. If no such features are present along the frangible path, the frangible path is separated in the mm span at the center of the belt width, and if necessary, a tab lead for pulling (such as hooked material or tape with tenacious adhesive) is affixed so as to enable a tensile pull without the separation of the tab. As used in this method, the term “laminate width” corresponds to the dimension of the belt that would be in the longitudinal direction in its orientation on a finished article.
  • At least three specimen replicates are prepared. It is acceptable for pairs of specimens to be performed on the same belt portion, particularly if two frangible paths exist together on either the front or back belt of a finished article.
  • Tensile Tester Configuration and Use
  • A constant rate of extension tensile tester is configured as follows. A 50 or 100 N load cell is used. A pneumatic lower grip at least 6 inches wide is used. A pneumatic upper grip at least 1 inch wide is used. Grip faces are chosen so as to minimize slippage and may be faced with rubber or sandpaper. The tensile tester crosshead speed is 8.5 mm/s. The default initial crosshead separation is 55 mm, though this may be adjusted as necessary to securely grip the specimen and facilitate the intended pull. The tensile tester is programmed for extension travel of 250 mm. Data are recorded at a frequency of at least 50 Hz.
  • Each specimen is mounted in the tensile tester with the full belt laminate width in the lower grip of the tensile tester. The belt is mounted such that the tear propagates in the direction of the frangible path. The one or more tabs, grip features, or affixed lead to facilitate tearing are clamped in the upper grip so as to minimize slack but not to impart tension. The load cell is then zeroed. The tensile test is then run to an extension of 250 mm at a rate of 8.5 mm/s and data are captured at a frequency of at least 50 Hz, as specified above.
  • Analysis and Reporting
  • Data from each of the tensile pulls from each specimen are plotted with load in Newtons (N) on the vertical axis and extension (mm) on the horizontal axis. Plots generally show an increase from low load as the pull begins, a load plateau over which load, while fluctuating, is overall unchanging, and may exhibit a breakage in which the load rapidly falls. For each specimen, the load is averaged (taking the arithmetic mean) and standard deviation calculated in the load plateau region and recorded as the average load and standard deviation for that specimen, respectively, in N. In turn, the average (arithmetic mean) of the specimen plateau averages is calculated and is reported to the nearest 0.01 N as the Pathway Tear Strength of the belt. The average (arithmetic mean) of the specimen plateau standard deviations is calculated and reported to the nearest 0.01 N as the Pathway Standard Deviation.
  • Material Tear Strength Test Method
  • In the Material Tear Strength Test Method, a belt material sample lacking a frangible pathway is torn using a constant rate of extension tensile tester. The method intent is to measure an average tear strength of the belt that results when a belt lacking a frangible path is torn in the same manner as is intended for a finished belt with a frangible pathway and often including a pull tab or some other element to initiate a tear. Material is preconditioned to 23±1° C. and 50±2% RH for at least two hours prior to testing, and all sample preparation and testing is carried out under these same conditions.
  • Sample Identification and Preparation
  • In many cases, only one of the front and rear belt contain a frangible pathway. In this instance, it is most preferred to use the belt (front or rear) lacking a frangible path for this method. Alternatively, belt portions are taken from belt laminate roll stock. If roll stock is not available, it is acceptable as a final alternative to perform this method on a region of the belt most distal from the frangible pathway(s).
  • Belts side seams are separated by hand. Belts both containing and lacking frangible pathways are excised from like finished articles. To prepare a specimen for testing, the belt containing a frangible pathway is stretched flat next to the belt lacking a frangible pathway with the same longitudinal and lateral orientation. Any cuts, tabs, or other features present along the frangible pathway to facilitate tearing of the frangible pathway are replicated in the belt lacking a frangible pathway, which is the specimen to be tested. If no such features are present along the frangible path, a simple tab (to enable tensile tester grip) 25 mm by 25 mm is cut centered in the laminate width. As used in this method, the term “laminate width” corresponds to the dimension of the belt that would be in the longitudinal direction in its orientation on a finished article.
  • At least three specimen replicates are prepared. It is acceptable for pairs of specimens to be performed on the same belt portion, particularly if two frangible pathways exist together on either the front or back belt of a finished article.
  • Tensile Tester Configuration and Use
  • A constant rate of extension tensile tester is configured as follows. A 50 or 100 N load cell is used. A pneumatic lower grip at least 6 inches wide is used. A pneumatic upper grip at least 1 inch wide is used. Grip faces are chosen so as to minimize slippage and may be faced with rubber or sandpaper. The tensile tester crosshead speed is 8.5 mm/s. The default initial crosshead separation is 15 mm, though this may be adjusted as necessary to securely grip the specimen and facilitate the intended pull. The tensile tester is programmed for extension travel of 250 mm. Data are recorded at a frequency of at least 50 Hz.
  • Each specimen is mounted in the tensile tester with the full laminate width in the lower grip of the tensile tester. The laminate is mounted such that the tear propagates generally from the center of the belt toward one of the side seams of the belt. The one or more tabs or grip features to facilitate tearing are clamped in the upper grip so as to minimize slack but not to impart tension. The load cell is then zeroed. The tensile test is then run to an extension of 250 mm at a rate of 8.5 mm/s and data are captured at a frequency of at least 50 Hz, as specified above.
  • Analysis and Reporting
  • Data from each of the tensile pulls (corresponding to each specimen) are plotted with load in Newtons (N) on the vertical axis and extension (mm) on the horizontal axis. Plots generally show an increase from low load as the pull begins, a load plateau over which load, while fluctuating, is overall unchanging, and may exhibit a breakage in which the load rapidly falls. For each specimen, the load is averaged (taking the arithmetic mean) and standard deviation calculated in the load plateau region and recorded as the average load and standard deviation for that specimen, respectively, in N. In turn, the average (arithmetic mean) of the specimen plateau averages is calculated and is reported to the nearest 0.01 N as the Belt Tear Strength of the belt. The average (arithmetic mean) of the specimen plateau standard deviations is calculated and reported to the nearest 0.01 N as the Belt Standard Deviation.
  • Softness Test Method
  • TS7 and TS750 values are measured using an EMTEC Tissue Softness Analyzer (“Emtec TSA”) (Emtec Electronic GmbH, Leipzig, Germany) interfaced with a computer running Emtec TSA software (version 3.19 or equivalent). According to Emtec, the TS7 value correlates with the real material softness, while the TS750 value correlates with the felt smoothness/roughness of the material. The Emtec TSA comprises a rotor with vertical blades which rotate on the test sample at a defined and calibrated rotational speed (set by manufacturer) and contact force of 100 mN. Contact between the vertical blades and the test piece creates vibrations, which create sound that is recorded by a microphone within the instrument. The recorded sound file is then analyzed by the Emtec TSA software.
  • Sample Preparation
  • Substrates and laminates are generally excised as belts from finished articles. Side seams are first separated by hand, and belt portions are then separated from the chassis, optionally using a separation aid such as cryogenic freeze spray. Constituent substrates may be further excised from laminates via an additional step in which the substrate layers of a laminate and any elastics or other elements present are separated, again optionally using a separation aid such as cryogenic freeze spray. In some cases, substrates and laminates, either with or without frangible pathways, available as roll stock may be tested directly. Test samples are prepared by cutting square or circular samples from a finished product. Test samples are cut to a length and width (or diameter if circular) of about 90 mm, and no greater than about 120 mm, in dimension. If the finished product has a discrete section of elastic region (i.e. elastic region is shorter in one or more dimensions than nonwoven facing-layers), a set of rectilinear specimens 76 mm±3 mm long in the primary stretch direction, and 100 mm±3 mm wide in the perpendicular direction is cut from the product part, with the elastic region centered in the rectilinear specimen where applicable. Test samples are selected to avoid creases or folds within the testing region, unless inherent to the sample such as corrugations. Prepare 8 substantially similar replicate samples for testing. Equilibrate all samples at TAPPI standard temperature and relative humidity conditions (23° C.±2 C.° and 50%±2%) for at least 1 hour prior to conducting the TSA testing, which is also conducted under TAPPI conditions.
  • Testing Procedure
  • Calibrate the instrument according to the manufacturer's instructions using the 1-point calibration method with Emtec reference standards (“ref.2 samples”). If these reference samples are no longer available, use the appropriate reference samples provided by the manufacturer. Calibrate the instrument according to the manufacturer's recommendation and instruction, so that the results will be comparable to those obtained when using the 1-point calibration method with Emtec reference standards (“ref.2 samples”).
  • Mount the test sample into the instrument and ensure the sample is clamped into the TSA instrument properly with its first surface facing upwards. For samples with a discrete section of elastic region, ensure that the elastic region is centered below the Emtec vertical blades, and then perform the test according to the manufacturer's instructions. When complete, the software displays values for TS7 and TS750. Record each of these values to the nearest 0.01 dB V2 rms.
  • The test piece is then removed from the instrument and discarded. This testing is performed individually on the first surface of four of the replicate samples, and on the second surface of the other four replicate samples.
  • The four test result values for TS7 and TS750 from the first surface are averaged (using a simple numerical average); the same is done for the four test result values for TS7 and TS750 from the second surface. Report the individual average values and standard deviation of TS7 and TS750 for both the first and second surfaces on a particular test sample to the nearest 0.01 dB V2 rms.
  • Average Decitex (Average-Dtex)
  • The Average Decitex Method is used to calculate the Average-Dtex on a length-weighted basis for elastic fibers present in an entire article, or in a specimen of interest extracted from an article. The decitex value is the mass in grams of a fiber present in 10,000 meters of that material in the relaxed state. The decitex value of elastic fibers or elastic laminates containing elastic fibers is often reported by manufacturers as part of a specification for an elastic fiber or an elastic laminate including elastic fibers. The Average-Dtex is to be calculated from these specifications if available. Alternatively, if these specified values are not known, the decitex value of an individual elastic fiber is measured by determining the cross-sectional area of a fiber in a relaxed state via a suitable microscopy technique such as scanning electron microscopy (SEM), determining the composition of the fiber via Fourier Transform Infrared (FT-IR) spectroscopy, and then using a literature value for density of the composition to calculate the mass in grams of the fiber present in 10,000 meters of the fiber. The manufacturer-provided or experimentally measured decitex values for the individual elastic fibers removed from an entire article, or specimen extracted from an article, are used in the expression below in which the length-weighted average of decitex value among elastic fibers present is determined.
  • The lengths of elastic fibers present in an article or specimen extracted from an article is calculated from overall dimensions of and the elastic fiber pre-strain ratio associated with components of the article with these or the specimen, respectively, if known. Alternatively, dimensions and/or elastic fiber pre-strain ratios are not known, an absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article is disassembled and all elastic fibers are removed. This disassembly can be done, for example, with gentle heating to soften adhesives, with a cryogenic spray (e.g., Quick-Freeze, Miller-Stephenson Company, Danbury, CT), or with an appropriate solvent that will remove adhesive but not swell, alter, or destroy elastic fibers. The length of each elastic fiber in its relaxed state is measured and recorded in millimeters (mm) to the nearest mm.
  • Calculation of Average-Dtex
  • For each of the individual elastic fibers fi of relaxed length Li and fiber decitex value di (obtained either from the manufacturer's specifications or measured experimentally) present in an absorbent article, or specimen extracted from an absorbent article, the Average-Dtex for that absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article is defined as:
  • Average - Dtex = i = 1 n ( L i × d i ) i = 1 n L i
  • where n is the total number of elastic fibers present in an absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article. The Average-Dtex is reported to the nearest integer value of decitex (grams per 10 000 m).
    If the decitex value of any individual fiber is not known from specifications, it is experimentally determined as described below, and the resulting fiber decitex value(s) are used in the above equation to determine Average-Dtex.
  • Experimental Determination of Decitex Value for a Fiber
  • For each of the elastic fibers removed from an absorbent article or specimen extracted from an absorbent article according to the procedure described above, the length of each elastic fiber Lk in its relaxed state is measured and recorded in millimeters (mm) to the nearest mm. Each elastic fiber is analyzed via FT-IR spectroscopy to determine its composition, and its density ρk is determined from available literature values. Finally, each fiber is analyzed via SEM. The fiber is cut in three approximately equal locations perpendicularly along its length with a sharp blade to create a clean cross-section for SEM analysis. Three fiber segments with these cross sections exposed are mounted on an SEM sample holder in a relaxed state, sputter coated with gold, introduced into an SEM for analysis, and imaged at a resolution sufficient to clearly elucidate fiber cross sections. Fiber cross sections are oriented as perpendicular as possible to the detector to minimize any oblique distortion in the measured cross sections. Fiber cross sections may vary in shape, and some fibers may consist of a plurality of individual filaments. Regardless, the area of each of the three fiber cross sections is determined (for example, using diameters for round fibers, major and minor axes for elliptical fibers, and image analysis for more complicated shapes), and the average of the three areas ak for the elastic fiber, in units of micrometers squared (μm2), is recorded to the nearest 0.1 μm2. The decitex dk of the kth elastic fiber measured is calculated by:

  • d k=10000 m×αk ×r k×10−6
  • where dk is in units of grams (per calculated 10,000 meter length), ak is in units of μm2, and ρk is in units of grams per cubic centimeter (g/cm 3). For any elastic fiber analyzed, the experimentally determined Lk and dk values are subsequently used in the expression above for Average-Dtex.
  • Average-Strand-Spacing
  • Using a ruler calibrated against a certified NIST ruler and accurate to 0.5 mm, measure the distance between the two distal strands within a section to the nearest 0.5 mm, and then divide by the number of strands in that section−1

  • Average-Strand-Spacing=d/(n−1) where n>1
      • report to the nearest 0.1 mm.
    Average-Pre-Strain
  • The Average-Pre-Strain of a specimen are measured on a constant rate of extension tensile tester (a suitable instrument is the MTS Insight using Testworks 4.0 Software, as available from MTS Systems Corp., Eden Prairie, MN) using a load cell for which the forces measured are within 1% to 90% of the limit of the cell. Articles are conditioned at 23° C.±2 C.° and 50%±2% relative humidity for 2 hours prior to analysis and then tested under the same environmental conditions.
  • Program the tensile tester to perform an elongation to break after an initial gage length adjustment. First raise the cross head at 10 mm/min up to a force of 0.05N. Set the current gage to the adjusted gage length. Raise the crosshead at a rate of 100 mm/min until the specimen breaks (force drops 20% after maximum peak force). Return the cross head to its original position. Force and extension data is acquired at a rate of 100 Hz throughout the experiment.
  • Set the nominal gage length to 40 mm using a calibrated caliper block and zero the crosshead. Insert the specimen into the upper grip such that the middle of the test strip is positioned 20 mm below the grip. The specimen may be folded perpendicular to the pull axis and placed in the grip to achieve this position. After the grip is closed the excess material can be trimmed. Insert the specimen into the lower grips and close. Once again, the strip can be folded, and then trimmed after the grip is closed. Zero the load cell. The specimen should have a minimal slack but less than 0.05 N of force on the load cell. Start the test program.
  • From the data construct a Force (N) verses Extension (mm). The Average-Pre-Strain is calculated from the bend in the curve corresponding to the extension at which the nonwovens in the elastic are engaged. Plot two lines, corresponding to the region of the curve before the bend (primarily the elastics), and the region after the bend (primarily the nonwovens). Read the extension at which these two lines intersect and calculate the % Pre-Strain from the extension and the corrected gage length. Record as % Pre-strain 0.1%. Calculate the arithmetic mean of three replicate samples for each elastomeric laminate and Average-Pre-Strain to the nearest 0.1%.
  • Combinations
  • A1. An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to Material Tear Strength test method, and wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength according to Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the pathway tear strength of the frangible pathway is less than the belt tear strength of the first belt.
  • A2. The absorbent article of according to paragraph A1, wherein the frangible pathway in first belt extends between a proximal terminus and a distal terminus.
  • A3. The absorbent article according to either of paragraphs A1 or A2, comprising an accessibility opening in the first belt positioned in the overlap region.
  • A4. The absorbent article according to paragraph A3, wherein the frangible pathway comprising a first tear zone extending for a first length from the accessibility opening to the distal terminus, and a second tear zone extending for a second length from the accessibility opening to the proximal terminus; and wherein the difference between the first length and the second length is less than about 10%.
  • A5. The absorbent article according to paragraph A2, wherein the distal terminus and the proximal terminus are positioned laterally between the first side edge of the chassis and the first side seam.
  • A6. The absorbent article according to any one of the preceding paragraphs, comprising a fastener component positioned between the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt and the backsheet.
  • A7. The absorbent article according to paragraph A6, wherein the first belt is separable along the frangible pathway to define a first belt zone and a second belt zone, and wherein the fastener component is adapted to refastenably connect at least one of the first belt zone and the second belt zone with at least one other component of the absorbent article in a disposal configuration.
  • A8. The absorbent article according to any one of the preceding paragraphs, wherein at least a portion of the frangible pathway is nonlinear.
  • B9. An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt comprising laterally opposing end portions connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, the frangible pathway comprising a first tear zone and a second tear zone; wherein a portion of the first tear zone extends at a first angle of less than about 90 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt, wherein a portion of the second tear zone extends at a second angle of less than about 90 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt, wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; wherein a portion of the frangible pathway extends within the chassis overlap region, wherein the frangible pathway is configured to tear along the first tear zone and the second tear zone resulting in a pathway tear strength according to Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the pathway tear strength to tear along the frangible pathway including the first tear zone and the second tear zone is from about 2N to about 16N.
  • B10. The absorbent article according to paragraph B9, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to the Material Tear Strength test method, and wherein the belt tear strength is greater than the pathway tear strength.
  • B11. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding paragraphs, comprising an accessibility opening in the first belt positioned between the outer edge and the inner edge.
  • B12. The absorbent article according to any of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the frangible pathway extends between a proximal terminus on the inner edge and a distal terminus on the outer edge of the first belt.
  • B13. The absorbent article according to paragraph B9, wherein the first angle is from 0 degrees to about 45 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt.
  • B14. The absorbent article according to paragraph B9, wherein the second angle is from 0 degrees to about 45 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt.
  • B15. The absorbent article according to any one of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the pathway tear strength of the frangible pathway including each of the first tear zone and the second tear zone is from about 5N to about 10N.
  • B16. The absorbent article according to paragraph B11, comprising a fastener component disposed adjacent to the accessibility opening.
  • C17. An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a fastener component disposed on the first belt; a first frangible pathway in the first belt, wherein the first frangible pathway comprises a first tear zone and a second tear zone; wherein the first tear zone comprises a first initial tear zone and a first secondary tear zone, the first initial tear zone extending from a first transition zone toward the fastener component, and the first secondary tear zone extending from the first transition zone toward the laterally extending outer edge; wherein the second tear zone comprises a second initial tear zone and a second secondary tear zone, the second initial tear zone extending from a second transition zone toward the fastener component, and the second secondary tear zone extending from the second transition zone toward the laterally extending inner edge, wherein each of the frangible pathway including the first tear zone and the second tear zone has a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, wherein the first tear zone and the second tear zone tear substantially simultaneously, and wherein the pathway tear strength is from about 2N to about 16 N.
  • C18. The absorbent article according to paragraph C17, wherein the fastener component is positioned between the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt and the backsheet.
  • C19. The absorbent article according to any one of the preceding claims, wherein the pathway tear strength of the frangible pathway including each of the first tear zone and the second tear zone is from about 5N to about 10N.
  • C20. The absorbent article according to any one of the preceding claims, comprising an accessibility opening in the first belt positioned in the overlap region.
  • C21. The absorbent article according to paragraph C20, wherein the first initial tear zone extends from the accessibility opening to the first transition zone, and wherein the second initial tear zone extends from the accessibility opening to the second transition zone.
  • D22. An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to the Material Tear Strength test method, and wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength is more than about 8N.
  • D23. The absorbent article according to paragraph D22, wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength is more than about 15N.
  • D24. The absorbent article according to paragraph D22, wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength is from about 10N to about 30N.
  • D25. The absorbent article according to paragraph D22, wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength of the first belt is from about 15N to about 25N.
  • E26. An absorbent article comprising: a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge; a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening; a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, wherein the frangible pathway comprises a first tear zone and a second tear zone, wherein the frangible pathway is configured to tear along the first tear zone and the second tear zone, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength and a belt standard deviation according to Material Tear Strength test method, wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength and a pathway standard deviation according to Pathway Tear Strength test method, and wherein the belt tear strength minus a standard deviation factor multiplied by the belt standard deviation is greater than the pathway tear strength plus the standard deviation factor multiplied by the pathway standard deviation, and wherein the standard deviation factor is at least 2.
  • E27. The absorbent article according to paragraph E26, wherein the standard deviation factor is from about 2 to about 4.
  • E28. The absorbent article according to paragraph E26, wherein the standard deviation factor is from about 2 to about 6.
  • E29. The absorbent article according to any one of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first belt comprises one or more elastic strands, and wherein the one or more elastic strands are deactivated along the frangible pathway.
  • The dimensions and values disclosed herein are not to be understood as being strictly limited to the exact numerical values recited. Instead, unless otherwise specified, each such dimension is intended to mean both the recited value and a functionally equivalent range surrounding that value. For example, a dimension disclosed as “40 mm” is intended to mean “about mm.”
  • Every document cited herein, including any cross referenced or related patent or application and any patent application or patent to which this application claims priority or benefit thereof, is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety unless expressly excluded or otherwise limited. The citation of any document is not an admission that it is prior art with respect to any invention disclosed or claimed herein or that it alone, or in any combination with any other reference or references, teaches, suggests, or discloses any such invention. Further, to the extent that any meaning or definition of a term in this document conflicts with any meaning or definition of the same term in a document incorporated by reference, the meaning or definition assigned to that term in this document shall govern.
  • While particular embodiments of the present invention have been illustrated and described, it would be obvious to those skilled in the art that various other changes and modifications can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. It is therefore intended to cover in the appended claims all such changes and modifications that are within the scope of this invention.

Claims (20)

What is claimed is:
1. An absorbent article comprising:
a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge;
a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening;
a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt,
wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; and
a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt,
wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to the Material Tear Strength test method,
wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and
wherein the pathway tear strength of the frangible pathway is less than the belt tear strength of the first belt.
2. The absorbent article of claim 1, wherein the frangible pathway in the first belt extends between a proximal terminus and a distal terminus.
3. The absorbent article of claim 2, comprising an accessibility opening in the first belt positioned in the overlap region.
4. The absorbent article of claim 3, wherein the frangible pathway comprising a first tear zone extending for a first length from the accessibility opening to the distal terminus, and a second tear zone extending for a second length from the accessibility opening to the proximal terminus; and wherein the difference between the first length and the second length is less than about 10%.
5. The absorbent article of claim 1, comprising a fastener component positioned between the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt and the backsheet.
6. The absorbent article of claim 5, wherein the first belt is separable along the frangible pathway to define a first belt zone and a second belt zone, and wherein the fastener component is adapted to refastenably connect at least one of the first belt zone and the second belt zone with at least one other component of the absorbent article in a disposal configuration.
7. The absorbent article of claim 1, wherein at least a portion of the frangible pathway is nonlinear.
8. An absorbent article comprising:
a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge;
a second belt comprising laterally opposing end portions connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening;
a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and
a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt, the frangible pathway comprising a first tear zone and a second tear zone;
wherein a portion of the first tear zone extends at a first angle of less than about 90 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt,
wherein a portion of the second tear zone extends at a second angle of less than about 90 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt,
wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region,
wherein a portion of the frangible pathway extends within the chassis overlap region,
wherein the frangible pathway is configured to tear along the first tear zone and the second tear zone resulting in a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and
wherein the pathway tear strength to tear along the frangible pathway including the first tear zone and the second tear zone is from about 2N to about 16N.
9. The absorbent article of claim 8, wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to the Material Tear Strength test method, and wherein the belt tear strength is greater than the pathway tear strength.
10. The absorbent article of claim 8, wherein the frangible pathway extends between a proximal terminus on the inner edge and a distal terminus on the outer edge of the first belt.
11. The absorbent article of claim 8, wherein the first angle is from 0 degrees to about 45 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt.
12. The absorbent article of claim 8, wherein the second angle is from 0 degrees to about 45 degrees from the lateral centerline of the first belt.
13. The absorbent article of claim 8, wherein the pathway tear strength of the frangible pathway including each of the first tear zone and the second tear zone is from about 5N to about 10N.
14. An absorbent article comprising:
a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface and an outer garment facing surface, the first belt further comprising a laterally extending inner edge and a laterally extending outer edge, the outer edge positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge;
a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening;
a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt,
wherein a portion of the chassis overlaps the inner wearer facing surface of the first belt to define a chassis overlap region; and
a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt,
wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength according to the Material Tear Strength test method,
wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and
wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength is more than about 8N.
15. The absorbent article of claim 14, wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength is more than about 15N.
16. The absorbent article of claim 14, wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength is from about 10N to about 30N.
17. The absorbent article of claim 14, wherein the difference between the pathway tear strength and the belt tear strength of the first belt is from about 15N to about 25N.
18. An absorbent article comprising:
a first belt comprising an inner wearer facing surface, an outer garment facing surface, a laterally extending inner edge, a laterally extending outer edge, and a lateral centerline, wherein the outer edge is positioned longitudinally outward of the inner edge;
a second belt, wherein laterally opposing end portions of the second belt are connected with laterally opposing end portions of the first belt at a first side seam and a second side seam to form a waist opening;
a chassis comprising a topsheet, a backsheet, and an absorbent core positioned between the topsheet and the backsheet, the chassis comprising a longitudinally extending first side edge and a longitudinally extending second side edge laterally separated from the first side edge by a first end edge and a second end edge longitudinally separate from the first end edge, and wherein longitudinally opposing end regions of the chassis are connected with the first belt and the second belt; and
a frangible pathway in the first belt extending between the inner edge and the outer edge of the first belt,
wherein the frangible pathway comprises a first tear zone and a second tear zone,
wherein the frangible pathway is configured to tear along the first tear zone and the second tear zone,
wherein the first belt has a belt tear strength and a belt standard deviation according to the Material Tear Strength test method,
wherein the frangible pathway has a pathway tear strength and a pathway standard deviation according to the Pathway Tear Strength test method, and
wherein the belt tear strength minus a standard deviation factor multiplied by the belt standard deviation is greater than the pathway tear strength plus the standard deviation factor multiplied by the pathway standard deviation, and wherein the standard deviation factor is at least 2.
19. The absorbent article of claim 18, wherein the standard deviation factor is from about 2 to about 4.
20. The absorbent article of claim 18, wherein the standard deviation factor is from about 2 to about 6.
US18/342,054 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones Pending US20240000637A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18/342,054 US20240000637A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US202263357043P 2022-06-30 2022-06-30
US202263432402P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US202263432400P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US202263432404P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US202263432401P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US202263432406P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US202263432410P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US202263432413P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US202263432403P 2022-12-14 2022-12-14
US18/342,054 US20240000637A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20240000637A1 true US20240000637A1 (en) 2024-01-04

Family

ID=87418699

Family Applications (13)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/214,564 Pending US20240000619A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles and methods and apparatuses for making absorbent articles with frangible pathways
US18/214,603 Pending US20240000632A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways with simultaneously propagating tear zones
US18/214,586 Pending US20240000625A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with absorbent chassis and belt elastic arrangements and frangible pathways
US18/214,718 Pending US20240000627A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways and disposal features
US18/342,058 Pending US20240000638A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones
US18/214,680 Pending US20240000633A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways and concealed disposal fastener components
US18/214,573 Pending US20240000631A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with absorbent chassis and belt bonding arrangements and frangible pathways
US18/342,054 Pending US20240000637A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones
US18/214,548 Pending US20240000624A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways with opening facilitation features
US18/214,626 Pending US20240000626A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways adapted for tear propagation between regions of laminates having different numbers of layers of substrates
US18/214,691 Pending US20240000634A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles and methods and apparatuses for making absorbent articles with frangible pathways
US18/214,569 Pending US20240000630A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways
US18/214,750 Pending US20240000635A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles and methods for making absorbent articles with frangible pathways

Family Applications Before (7)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/214,564 Pending US20240000619A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles and methods and apparatuses for making absorbent articles with frangible pathways
US18/214,603 Pending US20240000632A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways with simultaneously propagating tear zones
US18/214,586 Pending US20240000625A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with absorbent chassis and belt elastic arrangements and frangible pathways
US18/214,718 Pending US20240000627A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways and disposal features
US18/342,058 Pending US20240000638A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones
US18/214,680 Pending US20240000633A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways and concealed disposal fastener components
US18/214,573 Pending US20240000631A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with absorbent chassis and belt bonding arrangements and frangible pathways

Family Applications After (5)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/214,548 Pending US20240000624A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways with opening facilitation features
US18/214,626 Pending US20240000626A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways adapted for tear propagation between regions of laminates having different numbers of layers of substrates
US18/214,691 Pending US20240000634A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles and methods and apparatuses for making absorbent articles with frangible pathways
US18/214,569 Pending US20240000630A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles with frangible pathways
US18/214,750 Pending US20240000635A1 (en) 2022-06-30 2023-06-27 Absorbent articles and methods for making absorbent articles with frangible pathways

Country Status (2)

Country Link
US (13) US20240000619A1 (en)
WO (13) WO2024006714A1 (en)

Family Cites Families (148)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3113225A (en) 1960-06-09 1963-12-03 Cavitron Ultrasonics Inc Ultrasonic vibration generator
US3562041A (en) 1967-10-26 1971-02-09 Cavitron Corp Method and apparatus for the ultrasonic joining of materials according to a pattern
US3733238A (en) 1971-12-13 1973-05-15 Crompton & Knowles Corp Apparatus for vibration welding of sheet materials
US3860003B2 (en) 1973-11-21 1990-06-19 Contractable side portions for disposable diaper
DE3128538C2 (en) 1981-07-18 1985-03-14 Karl Mayer Textil-Maschinen-Fabrik Gmbh, 6053 Obertshausen Warping plant
US4909803A (en) 1983-06-30 1990-03-20 The Procter And Gamble Company Disposable absorbent article having elasticized flaps provided with leakage resistant portions
US4610678A (en) 1983-06-24 1986-09-09 Weisman Paul T High-density absorbent structures
CA1259151A (en) 1985-02-01 1989-09-12 Kenneth B. Buell Disposable waste containment garment
PH23956A (en) 1985-05-15 1990-01-23 Procter & Gamble Absorbent articles with dual layered cores
US4695278A (en) 1985-10-11 1987-09-22 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent article having dual cuffs
IL82511A (en) 1986-05-28 1992-09-06 Procter & Gamble Apparatus for and methods of airlaying fibrous webs having discrete particles therein
US4834735A (en) 1986-07-18 1989-05-30 The Proctor & Gamble Company High density absorbent members having lower density and lower basis weight acquisition zones
CA1290501C (en) 1986-10-10 1991-10-15 Jerry Layne Dragoo Absorbent article having leakage resistant dual cuffs
US4854984A (en) 1987-06-19 1989-08-08 The Procter & Gamble Company Dynamic mechanical bonding method and apparatus
US4940464A (en) 1987-12-16 1990-07-10 Kimberly-Clark Corporation Disposable incontinence garment or training pant
DE3913381C2 (en) 1989-04-24 1994-02-03 Mayer Textilmaschf Method for winding a sheet of thread on a warp beam and tree device
JP2664501B2 (en) 1989-12-22 1997-10-15 ユニ・チャーム株式会社 Disposable wearing articles
US5360420A (en) 1990-01-23 1994-11-01 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent structures containing stiffened fibers and superabsorbent material
US5110403A (en) 1990-05-18 1992-05-05 Kimberly-Clark Corporation High efficiency ultrasonic rotary horn
US5167897A (en) 1991-02-28 1992-12-01 The Procter & Gamble Company Method for incrementally stretching a zero strain stretch laminate web to impart elasticity thereto
US5221274A (en) 1991-06-13 1993-06-22 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent article with dynamic elastic waist feature having a predisposed resilient flexural hinge
US5246433A (en) 1991-11-21 1993-09-21 The Procter & Gamble Company Elasticized disposable training pant and method of making the same
KR100355652B1 (en) * 1993-06-25 2003-02-11 더 프록터 앤드 갬블 캄파니 Disposable pediatric panties with non-perforated cuts
US5643588A (en) 1994-11-28 1997-07-01 The Procter & Gamble Company Diaper having a lotioned topsheet
BE1008059A3 (en) 1994-02-02 1996-01-03 Picanol Nv METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DRAWING ON warp threads.
US5599335A (en) 1994-03-29 1997-02-04 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent members for body fluids having good wet integrity and relatively high concentrations of hydrogel-forming absorbent polymer
US5681302A (en) 1994-06-14 1997-10-28 Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company Elastic sheet-like composite
US6861571B1 (en) 1994-11-28 2005-03-01 The Procter & Gamble Company Article having a lotioned topsheet
US5569234A (en) 1995-04-03 1996-10-29 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable pull-on pant
US5628097A (en) 1995-09-29 1997-05-13 The Procter & Gamble Company Method for selectively aperturing a nonwoven web
US6120489A (en) 1995-10-10 2000-09-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Flangeless seam for use in disposable articles
US5575784A (en) * 1995-11-02 1996-11-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable training pant with improved disposal means
US6107539A (en) 1995-11-14 2000-08-22 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable absorbent articles having reduced surface wetness
FR2745987B1 (en) 1996-03-15 1998-06-12 GATHERING SLIDE AND MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREOF
US5897545A (en) 1996-04-02 1999-04-27 The Procter & Gamble Company Elastomeric side panel for use with convertible absorbent articles
US6120487A (en) 1996-04-03 2000-09-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable pull-on pant
US5702551A (en) 1996-04-03 1997-12-30 The Procter & Gamble Company Method for assembling a multi-piece absorbent article
US6248195B1 (en) 1996-11-21 2001-06-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Thermal joining of webs
US6107537A (en) 1997-09-10 2000-08-22 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable absorbent articles providing a skin condition benefit
DE19803638A1 (en) 1998-02-02 1999-08-05 Kuesters Eduard Maschf Device for processing a material web with ultrasound
US6545197B1 (en) 1998-05-02 2003-04-08 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable absorbent article having an improved topsheet
US6036796A (en) 1998-06-26 2000-03-14 Branson Electronics Closed-loop ultrasonic welding method and apparatus
TR200200679T2 (en) 1999-09-17 2002-06-21 The Procter & Gamble Company Elastomeric materials with low stress relaxation.
US6153209A (en) 1999-09-28 2000-11-28 The Procter & Gamble Company Article having a transferable breathable skin care composition thereon
JP3196933B2 (en) 1999-09-29 2001-08-06 株式会社日本吸収体技術研究所 Water-absorbing composite surface-coated with fibrous hot melt, method for producing the same, and absorbent article
US20020009940A1 (en) 2000-05-15 2002-01-24 May Raymond Jeffrey Targeted elastic laminate having zones of different polymer materials
US6508797B1 (en) * 2000-11-03 2003-01-21 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Pant-like disposable absorbent articles with a releasable line of weakness and a fastener
US20040158212A1 (en) 2003-02-10 2004-08-12 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable absorbent article comprising a durable hydrophilic core wrap
US6676054B2 (en) 2001-03-23 2004-01-13 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Unwinder for as-spun elastomeric fiber
US20030088223A1 (en) * 2001-04-13 2003-05-08 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Passive bonds for personal care article
US20020148557A1 (en) * 2001-04-13 2002-10-17 Kimberly-Clark Worlwide, Inc. Method of assembling personal care absorbent article
US6645330B2 (en) 2002-01-03 2003-11-11 Paragon Trade Brands, Inc. Method of making disposable absorbent article having graphics using ultrasonic thermal imaging
US20030233082A1 (en) 2002-06-13 2003-12-18 The Procter & Gamble Company Highly flexible and low deformation fastening device
EP1403419B1 (en) 2002-09-30 2006-05-31 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent articles comprising hydrophilic nonwoven fabrics
DE10319754A1 (en) 2003-04-30 2004-12-02 Carl Freudenberg Kg Elastic composite, process for its preparation and its use
US8118799B2 (en) * 2003-05-05 2012-02-21 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Disposable garment having first and second attachment members
JP4522073B2 (en) * 2003-10-24 2010-08-11 ユニ・チャーム株式会社 Disposable wearing articles
US7569039B2 (en) 2003-11-19 2009-08-04 The Procter & Gamble Company Disposable pull-on garment
US7587966B2 (en) 2004-02-05 2009-09-15 Zuiko Corporation Web processing device and web processing method
US7150730B2 (en) * 2004-03-01 2006-12-19 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Refastenable pant-like disposable undergarment
US20060032578A1 (en) 2004-08-16 2006-02-16 The Procter & Gamble Company Method for producing a laminate having varying pre-strained elastics
US20060094319A1 (en) 2004-11-03 2006-05-04 The Procter & Gamble Company Extensible laminate having elastics of differing elastic properties
JP4559827B2 (en) * 2004-11-24 2010-10-13 株式会社リブドゥコーポレーション Disposable pants
US20060135936A1 (en) * 2004-12-22 2006-06-22 Markovich Stacy N Absorbent garment having sensory cue for line of weakness
TWI529181B (en) 2005-02-28 2016-04-11 贏創德固賽有限責任公司 Water-absorbing polymer structures based upon renewable raw materials and process for their production
CN101193617B (en) * 2005-06-01 2011-10-05 Sca卫生产品股份公司 Absorbent article having disposal fastening means
US7905446B2 (en) 2005-12-30 2011-03-15 Overend Technologies Llc Unwind and feed system for elastomeric thread
US20070219521A1 (en) 2006-03-17 2007-09-20 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent article comprising a synthetic polymer derived from a renewable resource and methods of producing said article
US20080114322A1 (en) * 2006-11-10 2008-05-15 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Body panel for an adjustable pant-like disposable undergarment and the undergarment itself
US8043274B2 (en) * 2007-12-05 2011-10-25 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Disposable undergarment with stretch areas for optimal fit
US20090312737A1 (en) * 2008-06-17 2009-12-17 Gary Dean Lavon Absorbent Article Comprising A Barrier Attachment Zone
WO2010110154A1 (en) * 2009-03-23 2010-09-30 花王株式会社 Absorbent article
JP5969730B2 (en) 2009-12-28 2016-08-17 ユニ・チャーム株式会社 Absorbent article manufacturing equipment
US9226861B2 (en) 2010-04-09 2016-01-05 Gary Dean Lavon Converting lines and methods for fabricating both taped and pant diapers comprising substantially identical chassis
US8186296B2 (en) 2010-05-05 2012-05-29 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods and apparatus for applying adhesives in patterns to an advancing substrate
US20120061015A1 (en) 2010-09-14 2012-03-15 Gary Dean Lavon Method of Making Prefastened Refastenable Disposable Absorbent Articles
US8945326B2 (en) 2010-09-14 2015-02-03 The Procter & Gamble Company Method of making prefastened refastenable disposable absorbent articles
US20120263924A1 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-10-18 Paul Thomas Weisman Multi-Layer Films And Methods Of Forming Same
US9408761B2 (en) 2011-03-25 2016-08-09 The Procter & Gamble Company Article with nonwoven web component formed with loft-enhancing calendar bond shapes and patterns
US9526662B2 (en) 2012-02-08 2016-12-27 The Procter & Gamble Company Apparatuses and methods for folding absorbent articles
US20130211356A1 (en) 2012-02-13 2013-08-15 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent articles comprising substantially identical chassis
US9005392B2 (en) 2012-02-22 2015-04-14 The Procter & Gamble Company Apparatuses and methods for seaming substrates
US8778127B2 (en) 2012-02-22 2014-07-15 The Procter & Gamble Company Apparatuses and methods for bonding substrates
US20130255861A1 (en) 2012-03-30 2013-10-03 Uwe Schneider Apparatuses and Methods for Making Absorbent Articles
US9050213B2 (en) 2012-03-30 2015-06-09 The Procter & Gamble Company Apparatuses and methods for making absorbent articles
US8440043B1 (en) 2012-03-30 2013-05-14 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent article process and apparatus for intermittently deactivating elastics in elastic laminates
US20130255865A1 (en) 2012-03-30 2013-10-03 Tina Brown Methods and Apparatuses for Making Leg Cuffs for Absorbent Articles
US9028632B2 (en) 2012-03-30 2015-05-12 The Procter & Gamble Company Apparatuses and methods for making absorbent articles
US9039855B2 (en) 2012-03-30 2015-05-26 The Procter & Gamble Company Apparatuses and methods for making absorbent articles
US10106484B2 (en) 2012-04-11 2018-10-23 The Procter & Gamble Company Catalysts for the conversion of hydroxypropionic acid or its derivatives to acrylic acid or its derivatives
US8720666B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2014-05-13 The Procter & Gamble Company Apparatuses for transferring discrete articles
US8820513B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2014-09-02 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods for transferring discrete articles
US8607959B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2013-12-17 The Procter & Gamble Company Rotational assemblies and methods for transferring discrete articles
US8833542B2 (en) 2012-04-16 2014-09-16 The Procter & Gamble Company Fluid systems and methods for transferring discrete articles
JP5992609B2 (en) 2012-05-15 2016-09-14 ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー Method for manufacturing laminate for absorbent article
CN104661627B (en) 2012-09-21 2018-11-02 宝洁公司 Product with soft non-woven layer
WO2014079785A2 (en) 2012-11-26 2014-05-30 Basf Se Method for producing superabsorbers based on renewable raw materials
US20140148773A1 (en) 2012-11-27 2014-05-29 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent Articles with Substrates Having Patterned Slot Coated Adhesives
US9248054B2 (en) 2012-11-27 2016-02-02 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods and apparatus for making elastic laminates
US9295590B2 (en) 2012-11-27 2016-03-29 The Procter & Gamble Company Method and apparatus for applying an elastic material to a moving substrate in a curved path
US9265672B2 (en) 2012-11-27 2016-02-23 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods and apparatus for applying adhesives in patterns to an advancing substrate
US20140155855A1 (en) * 2012-11-30 2014-06-05 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Adjustable Pant-Like Disposable Undergarment With Attachment Assembly Concealing A Line Of Weakness And Method Of Manufacture
US9962297B2 (en) 2013-06-19 2018-05-08 The Procter & Gamble Company Bonding apparatus and method
JP2016526401A (en) 2013-06-19 2016-09-05 ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー Joining apparatus and method
CN107072853A (en) 2014-10-14 2017-08-18 宝洁公司 Absorbent article with fastening system
US10390998B2 (en) 2014-11-07 2019-08-27 The Procter & Gamble Company Process and apparatus for manufacturing an absorbent article using a laser source
WO2016196024A1 (en) 2015-06-02 2016-12-08 The Procter & Gamble Company Process and apparatus for manufacturing an absorbent article using a laser source
US20170000663A1 (en) 2015-06-30 2017-01-05 The Procter & Gamble Company Nonwoven web formed with loft-enhancing calender bond shapes and patterns, and articles including the same
WO2017070142A1 (en) * 2015-10-20 2017-04-27 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent articles comprising a separable belt
EP3429525A1 (en) 2016-03-15 2019-01-23 The Procter and Gamble Company Method and apparatus for manufacturing an absorbent article including an ultra short pulse laser source
WO2017160899A1 (en) 2016-03-15 2017-09-21 The Procter & Gamble Company Method and apparatus for manufacturing an absorbent article including an ultra short pulse laser source
WO2017160900A1 (en) 2016-03-15 2017-09-21 The Procter & Gamble Company Method and apparatus for manufacturing an absorbent article including an ultra short pulse laser source
CN108778211A (en) 2016-04-20 2018-11-09 宝洁公司 Device and method for unfolded absorbent article
US10807263B2 (en) 2016-12-07 2020-10-20 The Procter & Gamble Company Flexible curvilinear knife
US11642249B2 (en) 2016-12-20 2023-05-09 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods and apparatuses for making elastomeric laminates with elastic strands provided with a spin finish
WO2018170027A1 (en) 2017-03-13 2018-09-20 Universities Space Research Association System and method to hardcode interger linear optimization problems on physical implementations of the ising model
JP6861422B2 (en) 2017-03-13 2021-04-21 学校法人東京女子医科大学 Estrogen-like action composition, pharmaceuticals, foods and drinks containing it, method for producing estrogen-like action composition, and method of using the DNA base sequence of Sparassis crispa
JP6596458B2 (en) 2017-03-13 2019-10-23 株式会社日立建機ティエラ Hydraulic drive device for electric hydraulic work machine
CA3056455A1 (en) 2017-03-13 2018-09-20 Hubbell Incorporated Electrical connector and sleeve for electrical contact
EP3597061B1 (en) 2017-03-13 2023-05-03 Asahi Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha Brassiere
JP2018150596A (en) 2017-03-14 2018-09-27 千代田化工建設株式会社 Organic substance production system and manufacturing method thereof
JP2018154674A (en) 2017-03-15 2018-10-04 出光興産株式会社 Method for producing polyether compound
CN110402225A (en) 2017-03-15 2019-11-01 东洋铝爱科制造株式会社 Containing case
WO2018168874A1 (en) 2017-03-15 2018-09-20 株式会社 東芝 Etching solution, etching method and method for manufacturing electronic component
JP7091607B2 (en) 2017-03-16 2022-06-28 凸版印刷株式会社 Learning support terminal, learning support server, learning support system, learning support method, and learning support program
WO2018170026A2 (en) 2017-03-16 2018-09-20 Alpine Immune Sciences, Inc. Cd80 variant immunomodulatory proteins and uses thereof
WO2018168891A1 (en) 2017-03-16 2018-09-20 日本精工株式会社 Electric power steering device
JP6743734B2 (en) 2017-03-16 2020-08-19 株式会社オートネットワーク技術研究所 Shape maintenance tool
WO2018168878A1 (en) 2017-03-16 2018-09-20 日新電機株式会社 Gate valve device
JP2018154364A (en) 2017-03-17 2018-10-04 東洋製罐株式会社 Small capacity container for viscous substance
RU2763485C2 (en) * 2017-05-31 2021-12-29 Кимберли-Кларк Ворлдвайд, Инк. Absorbent products closed on sides, opening from front or back
WO2018222457A1 (en) * 2017-05-31 2018-12-06 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Front or rear opening closed-sided absorbent articles
EP3675785B1 (en) 2017-09-01 2021-11-10 The Procter & Gamble Company Methods and apparatuses for making elastomeric laminates
US11147718B2 (en) 2017-09-01 2021-10-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Beamed elastomeric laminate structure, fit, and texture
WO2019070041A1 (en) 2017-10-04 2019-04-11 Ntn株式会社 Sliding member
WO2019070042A1 (en) 2017-10-05 2019-04-11 マクセル株式会社 Contactless internal measurement device, contactless internal measurement method, and internal measurement result display system
US11547613B2 (en) 2017-12-05 2023-01-10 The Procter & Gamble Company Stretch laminate with beamed elastics and formed nonwoven layer
CN111417507B (en) 2017-12-07 2022-04-15 宝洁公司 Flexible bond
US11433158B2 (en) 2017-12-12 2022-09-06 The Procter & Gamble Company Recycle friendly and sustainable absorbent articles
FR3079166B1 (en) 2018-03-21 2023-10-20 Aplix Sa LAMINATED ASSEMBLY, DIAPER PANTS COMPRISING SUCH A SET AND METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING SUCH A SET
WO2020062132A1 (en) * 2018-09-29 2020-04-02 The Procter & Gamble Company Wearable article having disposal wrapping means
US11389986B2 (en) 2018-12-06 2022-07-19 The Procter & Gamble Company Compliant anvil
WO2020219414A1 (en) 2019-04-24 2020-10-29 The Procter & Gamble Company Highly extensible nonwoven webs and absorbent articles having such webs
CN115151226A (en) 2020-02-28 2022-10-04 宝洁公司 Pants-type absorbent article and method for producing same
JP2023514858A (en) 2020-03-04 2023-04-11 ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー Method and Apparatus for Making Elastomeric Laminates with Elastic Strands Unwound from Individual Spools
US20210282797A1 (en) 2020-03-10 2021-09-16 Boston Scientific Limited Medical device handle assemblies and methods of using the same
CN216257825U (en) 2020-11-10 2022-04-12 宝洁公司 Belt assembly for absorbent articles
WO2023088179A1 (en) 2021-11-19 2023-05-25 The Procter & Gamble Company Absorbent article with front and/or back waist regions having a high-stretch zone and a low-stretch zone and methods for making

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US20240000624A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006718A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006721A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000631A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006727A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000630A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006714A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006717A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000633A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000634A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006723A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000635A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000638A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000627A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000619A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006722A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006720A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006716A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000632A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006715A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000625A1 (en) 2024-01-04
US20240000626A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006724A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006719A1 (en) 2024-01-04
WO2024006728A1 (en) 2024-01-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP1962760B1 (en) Relative stiffness fasteners
JP5917680B2 (en) Tape-type article and pant-type article array
US6923798B2 (en) Mechanical tape fastening system for disposable absorbent articles
US7189220B2 (en) Diaper fastener with two nonwoven fabric components coated with thermoplastic synthetic resin
US20080021432A1 (en) Relative stiffness fasteners
US20110118693A1 (en) Method of making wearing article and this wearing article
US20220142828A1 (en) Belt assemblies for absorbent articles
US11752045B2 (en) Front or rear opening closed-sided absorbent articles
WO2023088179A1 (en) Absorbent article with front and/or back waist regions having a high-stretch zone and a low-stretch zone and methods for making
US20240000637A1 (en) Absorbent articles with frangible pathways having tear zones
EP1372560B1 (en) Mechanical tape fastening system for disposable absorbent articles

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

AS Assignment

Owner name: THE PROCTER & GAMBLE COMPANY, OHIO

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:TAYLOR, NICHLAS ALEXANDER;WILLHAUS, KEITH RICHARD;XU, HAN;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20230629 TO 20230630;REEL/FRAME:066768/0255